piasmanual en

Generated on February 7, 2013

Manual of PIAS1

Program for the Integral Approach ofShipdesign

Scheepsbouwkundig Advies en Reken Centrum (SARC) BVBrinklaan 109 A111404 GA Bussum, The NetherlandsPhone +31 35 6915024Fax +31 35 6918303E-mail [email protected]

1The software described in this manual is furnished under a licence agreement. The software may be used or copied only in accordancewith the terms of that agreement. The software is protected by the copyright laws which pertain to computer software, it is illegal to makecopies of the program or this manual other than for the use or backup by a ligitimate user. Copyright (©1993-2012) of software and manual isheld by SARC BV.

www.sarc.nl

Contents

1 PIAS: Introduction 31.1 Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 PIAS renewals (2012-2014) 52.1 An alternative system of module identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.2 Re-distribution of modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.3 New main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.4 Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.5 Typographical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.6 File and backup system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82.7 Simultaneous multi-module operation on the same project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3 Getting started with PIAS 93.1 PIAS renewal 2012-2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93.2 Installation of PIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3.2.1 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93.2.2 Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93.2.3 Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.3 Manuals and exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113.4 Working with PIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3.4.1 PIAS Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123.4.2 Data input with PIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133.4.3 Selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133.4.4 Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.5 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143.5.1 Project Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143.5.2 Program setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153.5.3 Print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153.5.4 Night colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153.5.5 Screen Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153.5.6 Default Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153.5.7 Screen colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153.5.8 Restore column widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3.6 Definitions and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163.7 Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3.7.1 Save data on disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173.7.2 Create backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173.7.3 Restore data from backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173.7.4 Import data from other project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173.7.5 Quit program without saving the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3.8 Closing remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

© SARC, Bussum, The Netherlands February 7, 2013

ii CONTENTS

4 Installation details 194.1 Sentinel, additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

4.1.1 Required DLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194.1.2 Network Sentinel SuperPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194.1.3 Handleiding en utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194.1.4 Possible problems Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

4.2 Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194.3 Temporary files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194.4 ASCII text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4.4.1 Output in multiple languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204.5 Export of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204.6 Environment variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4.6.1 List of environment variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204.7 Key sequence macro’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204.8 Macro commands for PIAS and Fairway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204.A Appendix: Speed enhancing mechanisms in PIAS: PIAS/ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4.A.1 Minimization of disc usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214.A.2 Dualthreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214.A.3 Total speed gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

5 Config: Configurations for hydrostatics, and stability calculations 235.1 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

5.1.1 General setup for stability calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245.1.1.1 1.1 output language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245.1.1.2 1.2 Name of "light ship" in loading conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245.1.1.3 1.3 Stability with the free to trim effect (constant LCG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245.1.1.4 1.4 (Damage) stability including shift of COG's of tank contents . . . . . 245.1.1.5 config_general_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.6 1.6 Wave characteristics for hydrostatics and stability calculations . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.7 1.7 Location of the top of the wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.8 1.8 1.9 Wave length for stability calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.9 1.9 Wave direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.10 config_general_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.11 config_general_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.12 config_general_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.13 config_general_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.1.1.14 config_general_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.1.15 config_general_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

5.1.2 Angles of inclination for stability calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.3 Trims for hydrostatics, cross-curves and maximum VCG' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.4 Setup for hydrostatics, cross-curves and maximum VCG' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.5 Setup for loading conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.6 Setup for longitudinal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.7 Setup for damage stability calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.8 Setup for compartments and tank sounding tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.9 Definition of asymmetrical hull forms and composed hull forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.10 Definition of keel plate thickness and slope of keel line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.11 Definition of frame spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.12 Definition of draft marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265.1.13 E-mail settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26


CONTENTS iii

6 Fairway: hull shape design 276.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

6.1.1 Basics of Fairway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286.1.2 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

6.1.2.1 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296.1.2.2 Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

6.2 Start and main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336.3 Graphical User Interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

6.3.1 Start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356.3.2 GUI Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

6.3.2.1 Modelling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356.3.2.2 Tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366.3.2.3 Levels of information and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366.3.2.4 Keyboard operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

6.3.3 Navigation: Pan, Zoom and Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396.3.3.1 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396.3.3.2 Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396.3.3.3 Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406.3.3.4 Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406.3.3.5 Perspective views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406.3.3.6 3Dconnexion navigation device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406.3.3.7 Navigation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

6.3.4 The dragger: interactive graphical positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416.3.5 Modelling actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

6.3.5.1 Common functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426.3.5.2 Change the shape of a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436.3.5.3 New Planar Polycurve by Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526.3.5.4 Move polycurve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546.3.5.5 Remove Polycurve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556.3.5.6 Properties of polycurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566.3.5.7 Curve Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576.3.5.8 Systemize polycurve names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586.3.5.9 Join polycurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586.3.5.10 Split polycurve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586.3.5.11 Connect Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596.3.5.12 Generate Fillet Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596.3.5.13 Show Indicative Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606.3.5.14 Change the shape of the SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

6.3.6 Supporting functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626.3.6.1 Clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626.3.6.2 Hydrostatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

6.3.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636.4 Name, dimensions and coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

6.4.1 Main dimensions (design) & hull coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666.5 File and solid management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

6.5.1 File history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676.5.2 Save current design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676.5.3 Solid management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676.5.4 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696.5.5 Quit the program without saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

6.6 Settings and miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696.6.1 General configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

6.6.1.1 Program setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70


iv CONTENTS

6.6.1.2 With curved surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706.6.1.3 Configuration GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706.6.1.4 Title block lines plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

6.6.2 Define special points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706.6.3 Uniform weight factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716.6.4 Uniform mean deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716.6.5 Check network and lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716.6.6 Make all lines consistent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716.6.7 Remove all "internal" points from all lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716.6.8 Close vessel at deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716.6.9 Change color scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716.6.10 Define default window layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

6.7 Show (rendered and colored) surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726.7.1 Notes about certain features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

6.8 Export of hullform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746.8.1 Accountability regarding production fairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

6.8.1.1 Definition of production fairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756.8.1.2 Production fair delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756.8.1.3 Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756.8.1.4 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

6.8.2 Create file in PIAS-ordinate format (.HYD file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756.8.3 Create file in PIAS surface format (.TRI file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756.8.4 Offsets to ASCII-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756.8.5 All lines to AutoCAD DXF format in three 2D views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766.8.6 All lines to 3D AutoCAD DXF-POLYLINE format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766.8.7 All lines to 3-D AutoCAD NURBS format (Acad V14+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766.8.8 All lines as NURBS to IGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776.8.9 All faces to IGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776.8.10 All lines to NUPAS import format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786.8.11 All lines to Eagle format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786.8.12 Relevant lines to Stearbear / Tribon format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786.8.13 Relevant lines to Schiffko format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786.8.14 Create finite element model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796.8.15 Create Dawson-model (MARIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796.8.16 Create Rapid Prototyping file (including segmentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796.8.17 Frames to Poseidon (Germanischer Lloyd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806.8.18 Frames to Castor (ASC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806.8.19 Relevant lines to ShipConstructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806.8.20 Enable hullform to be used as a Hull Server shape data base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

6.9 Define/draw lines plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816.10 Hullform transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

6.10.1 Generate the target SAC from the Lap-diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816.10.2 Generate the target SAC from the present hullform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826.10.3 Specify hullform transformation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

6.10.3.1 Inflate, deflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836.10.3.2 Increase / decrease parallel part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836.10.3.3 Shift complete vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836.10.3.4 Linear scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836.10.3.5 Ordinate shift (Lackenby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

6.10.4 Specify envelop lines midship section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846.10.5 Transformation of the target SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846.10.6 Perform complete hullform transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846.10.7 General rotation and scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85


CONTENTS v

6.11 Domains and surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856.12 Legacy GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856.13 Alphanumerical manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856.14 Manipulate groups of line places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866.A Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

6.A.1 File extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866.A.2 File format of diagrams for generation of a sectional area curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866.A.3 Customizing the dragger appearance (advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

6.A.3.1 File format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906.A.3.2 Increasing the dragger size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916.A.3.3 Changing the arrow head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916.A.3.4 Adjusting hotspot appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916.A.3.5 Switching off the feedback plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

7 Preprocessor for Fairway 937.1 Drawing exchange formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937.2 Neutral file formats for the exchange of curves and solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937.3 Capabilities of this preprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947.4 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

7.4.1 Import lines from DXF format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957.4.2 Intermezzo on polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957.4.3 Import lines from IGES format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967.4.4 Merge single-connected lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967.4.5 Edit line geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977.4.6 Generate wireframe model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977.4.7 Edit wireframe model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977.4.8 Check wireframe model (to some extent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987.4.9 Generate solid model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987.4.10 Remove solid, lines or points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987.4.11 Tolerance (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

7.5 Using a CXF file in Fairway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987.6 Using a SXF file in Fairway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997.7 Final remarks on file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997.8 A brief introduction to topology and connectivity of solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997.9 Syntax of Curve eXchange Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007.10 Syntax of Solid eXchange Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

8 Hulldef: Hullform definition 103

9 Hulltran: Hullform transformation 1059.1 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

9.1.1 Filename transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059.1.2 Hullform transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059.1.3 Change parallel body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069.1.4 Stop, without saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

9.1.4.1 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106


vi CONTENTS

10 Newlay: internal geometry design 10710.1 Definitions and basic concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

10.1.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10710.1.2 Use of different types of subcompartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10810.1.3 Naming convention for compartments etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10910.1.4 Links to subcompartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10910.1.5 Processing the hull shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

10.2 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11010.3 Graphical User Interface of planes and compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

10.3.1 GUI components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11010.3.2 General operations and modus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

10.3.2.1 Mouse buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11110.3.2.2 Left mouse button and modus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11210.3.2.3 How long stays a function assigned to a mouse button? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11210.3.2.4 Operation in the 3D subwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11310.3.2.5 Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11410.3.2.6 The shape of a plane (the green dots) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

10.3.3 GUI functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11510.3.3.1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11510.3.3.2 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11610.3.3.3 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11610.3.3.4 Refplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11810.3.3.5 Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

10.4 Compartment list, calculation of tank tables etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11910.4.1 Compartment definition window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

10.4.1.1 Design of the compartment definition window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12110.4.1.2 Compartment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12310.4.1.3 Subcompartment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

10.4.2 Calculate and print tank tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12610.5 Other lists, and program configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

10.5.1 List of physical planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12710.5.1.1 Popup menu plane orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12710.5.1.2 Angled planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

10.5.2 List of reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12910.5.3 Compartment tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12910.5.4 general program configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12910.5.5 Names and color per part category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13010.5.6 Define weight groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13110.5.7 Notes and remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

10.6 Threedimensional presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13110.7 Subdivision plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

10.7.1 Configuration subdivision plan and DXF export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13410.7.2 Names and color per part category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13410.7.3 Subdivision plan layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13410.7.4 Subdivision plan preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13610.7.5 Subdivision plan to paper or file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13610.7.6 3D-plan to DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

10.8 Conversion, and import and export of subdivision data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13610.8.1 Generate physical planes from the totality of "convertible" subcompartments . . . . . . . 13710.8.2 Overlap test compartments & advice setup on convertibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13710.8.3 Clean pre-2012 PIAS compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13710.8.4 Import PIAS compartments in pre-2012 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13810.8.5 Export compartments to PIAS’ pre-2012 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138


CONTENTS vii

10.8.6 Export decks and bulkheads to Rapid Prototyping format (STL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13810.8.7 Write XML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13810.8.8 Read XML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

10.9 File and backup management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13810.10Compatibilitity with the former compartment module of PIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

10.10.1 Compartment files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13810.10.2 Functional enhancements of Newlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

11 Hydrotables: create hydrostatics and stability tables 14111.1 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14111.2 Configure table and diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

11.2.1 Hydrostatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.2 Cross curve tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.3 Cross curve diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.4 Bonjean tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.5 Deadweight tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.6 Deadweight schale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.7 Wind heeling moment tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.8 Maximum VCG’ intact tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.9 Maximum VCG’ intact diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.10 Maximum VCG’ damaged tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.11 Floodable lengths curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.12 Maximum grain heeling moment tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.2.13 van der Ham’s trim diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

11.3 Specify output sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.4 Print/plot the configured tables or diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14211.5 Write the configured output values to an XML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14311.6 Configure the Llocal cloud monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14311.7 Activate the Local cloud monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14311.8 Database of configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

12 Loading: loading conditions, stability and longitudinal strength 14512.1 Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14512.2 Loading conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

12.2.1 Weight list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14512.3 Input and settings intact stability and longitudinal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

12.3.1 Settings intact stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.3.2 Settings longitudinal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.3.3 Definition of weight groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.3.4 Definition maximum allowable shearforces and bending moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.3.5 Define sections for sketches of tank contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.3.6 Define external forces such as anchor chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.3.7 Re-read ALL tank capacity tables for existing tank weight items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

12.4 data for hopper stability calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.5 Generation of loading conditions for simulation RoRo operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.6 Input damage stability data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14612.7 Combined output to paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

13 ASCPIAS: Conversion of a frame table in ASCII format to PIAS format 147

14 Conversion of the hullform from SIKOB to PIAS 14914.1 Guidelines for this module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

15 Piaseagl: Import/export to and from Eagle 151


CONTENTS 1

16 Gastank: define gas tank shape 15316.1 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

16.1.1 Parametric shape definition of the gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15316.1.2 Convert the parametric model into a PIAS hull shape file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

17 Cntslot: container slot definition 15517.1 Cntslot: container slot definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15517.2 General method of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

17.2.1 Input general data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15517.2.2 General slot data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15617.2.3 Define types of containerslots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15617.2.4 Define kinds of containerslots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15617.2.5 4 Selection of silhouette side-views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15617.2.6 Input of basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15617.2.7 Generate container slots according to basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15717.2.8 Process container slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Index 159


2 CONTENTS


Chapter 1

PIAS: Introduction

This is the manual for the Program of Integral Approach of Ship design, PIAS. In this manual, you will find a description ofall modules available within PIAS.

For general information and an overview of the modules you can visit our website: www. sarc. nl/ pias/

general . Here you can also donwload folders and technical background information. Furthermore the PIAS Train-ing package can be downloaded here. This is a package of exercises, example ships and PIAS models that teaches youthe basic skills for using PIAS. Moreover you learn the best way to start using PIAS: Input hull, compartments, openings,etc.

1.1 Contact

For a more thorough understanding of PIAS we recommend you to contact SARC about a course.SARC website: www.sarc.nlSARC e-mail: [email protected]

Figure 1.1: SARC website


www.sarc.nl/pias/general

www.sarc.nl/pias/general

www.sarc.nl

mailto:[email protected]

4 PIAS: Introduction


Chapter 2

PIAS renewals (2012-2014)

In the years 2012-2014 the look-and-feel of PIAS will be renewed, with the focus on:

• An alternative system of module identification.

• A re-distribution of modules, with some modules to be completely rewritten.

• A new main menu.

• A new manuals system.

• Typographical modifications.

• A generic file and backup system.

• Simultaneous multi-module operation on the same project.

These modifications will be discussed briefly in this (temporary) chapter. By the way, this chapter deals specificallywith the modifications in PIAS. A novel user, not yet aquainted with existing PIAS, is advised to skip this chapter for awhile, and to return in a later stage.

2.1 An alternative system of module identification

PIAS is subdivided into modules, e.g. for compartment definition or computation of hydrostatic tables. Thesemodules were identified by a module number, which was at the same time the manual chapter number. Thosechapter numbers were fixed, and to allow for a later insertion of a new chapter they were not consecutive. Besides,the module had a general description in main menu and manual (and a program executable name too, but that wasnot used). E.g. the module for intact stability was chapter 240, with description ‘Integrated loading conditionsand longitudinal strength calculation’ (with program name ‘loading.exe’). In new PIAS there is an unambiguousidentification, which is a short word, describing the essence of the module (and which is, not coincidential, also theprograms executable name). This identification is used the main menu, in the manual and in references within themanual. By the way, when pointing to a specific module in the main menu a tooltip pops up with a short moduledescription, so that also a novel user can see the core functionality of that module at a single glance. Chapternumbers in the manual play no role anymore.

2.2 Re-distribution of modules

PIAS contains so many functions, configurations and tools that, in order to maintain an overview, a subdivision inparts, or modules, is nessecary. However, PIAS did contain a number of modules which only performed a smalltask. Those are being merged in less, but larger collection modules, such as summarized in the table below:


6 PIAS renewals (2012-2014)

New module Purpose Replaces old module(s)

Fairway Hull design, fairing, visualisation and hull shape con-version.

A combination of existing Fairway(chapter 20) and To_fair (chapter19).

Hulldef Input of hull-related data, such as an existing body plan,openings, appendages, deck line and wind contour.

Chapters 70, 90, 100, 100, 120,250 (only input part), 355 en 357.

Newlay Input of internal geometry such as bulkheads, decks andcompartments, as well as the calculation of tank sound-ing tables etc.

Compart (chapter 210).

Hulltran Hull form transformation. Chapters 80 and 85.

Hydrotables Calculations and outpput of stability-related tables, suchas hydrostatics, cross curves, maximum allowable V-CG’ (intact and damaged) and deadweight tables anddeadweight scale.

Chapters 170, 180, 185, 190, 200,250, 260, 280, 292 and 295.

Loading Input of loading conditions and computation of intactstability, longitudinal strength and deterministic dam-age stability.

Chapters 240, 275 and 290.

Probdam Probabilistic damage stability. Same as module 294.

Config General project configurations. Same as module 130.

Unmodified Other modules remain unchanged, such as those for thecomputation of freeboard, grain heeling moments, re-sistance and propulsion.

—

2.3 New main menu

The new module distribution also requires a new organisation of PIAS’ main menu, which is also equipped witha new look. This new main menu is further discussed in section 3.4.1 on page 12, PIAS Main menu, and to seethe difference at a glance both the old and new menus are depicted below. Please bear in mind that some eldermodules have disappeared, because their functionalities are incorporated in new, more comprehensive modules.Those vanished modules are no longer included in the new main menu, so in order to activate them, the old menuwill have to be used. For the time being the program name of the old menu is yet PIASmenu and that of the newone newPIASmenu. however, at a certain moment they will be swapped to classicPIASmenu and PIASmenurespectively.


2.4 Manuals 7

Figure 2.1: PIAS’ new main menu

Figure 2.2: Classic PIAS main menu

2.4 Manuals

For a long time past, the manuals of PIAS existed from a single PDF file for each module. However, at this momentthey are being converted to a new system where they will become available in three formats; PDF, HTML and ina help reader. In section 3.3 on page 11, Manuals and exercises this subject is addressed. In this transition periodfrom old to new the situation is a bit confusing; new software parts (such as Newlay and the new GUI from Fairway)are discussed in the new manual, while older modules still exist in the old manual. SARC is busy to bring theentire manual to the new system as quickly as possible, however, in the mean time we ask for your understanding.

2.5 Typographical modifications

Until recently in PIAS only the use of so-called non-proportional fonts was allowed, such as courier. In newPIAS als proportional fonts can be used, such as Times new Roman or Sans serif, for monitor as well as outputto paper (or export file such as .rtf). For that purpose all modules have to be slightly adapted, a process whichwill take some time. At modules which are not yet adapted only a non-proportional font will be used, regardslesswhich font was specified by the user. However, the number of such modules will decrease gradually.


8 PIAS renewals (2012-2014)

2.6 File and backup system

It can be useful to have a backup copy of design data at a certain stage, e.g. if it concerns a design variant whichneeds to be saved for future reference. Obviously, file copies can be created outside control of PIAS, but that hasnot proven to be rather handy. So, the PIAS modules will gradually be equipped with a uniform system for fileand backup management of that specific module. That system is discussed in section 3.7 on page 16, Backups.Some modules (such as the inclining test or freeboard modules) already had a file history facility, that will also bereplaced by the new system.

2.7 Simultaneous multi-module operation on the same project

Ship data are saved on file, however, a new and alternative communication system has been developped, whichis baptized local cloud. This facilitates inter-communication between PIAS modules, without using discfiles, andwithout the user involvement. The advantage is that the effect of modified input on a calculation result can directlybe made visible. Two examples:

• When a user has the screens of the new PIAS modules form input and loading conditions open, with the lastone showing the bar chart of the stability index, then a modification of, for example, the height of an openingin module form input is directly translated to another stability index in the loading conditions module. Thatmay change, for example, from red into green.

• If one has the modules Fairway and Newlay simultaneously open, then one sees that a hull form modificationin Fairway is directly processed in Newlay. We have made a short video clip of this example, which can befound on www.sarc.nl/piasfrigate and http://youtu.be/LUfbpjprrfs, in which you can see howa hull form modification in Fairway is converted in a modification of the form of the tank top in Newlay.


www.sarc.nl/piasfrigate

http://youtu.be/LUfbpjprrfs

Chapter 3

Getting started with PIAS

The PIAS suite consists of many modules, which each address a specific area of ship design, such as hull form def-inition, hull form design, extended hydrostatics, intact and damage stability calculations and resistance and propulsionestimations. In subsequent chapters each module will be elaborated, but prior to that in this chapter the installation of theprogram, the main menu general menu options and definitions will be addressed.

3.1 PIAS renewal 2012-2014

In these years PIAS is being refurbished, a proccess which is discussed in chapter 2 on page 5, PIAS renewals(2012-2014). It is advised to take notice of the details as discussed in that chapter.

3.2 Installation of PIAS

Installation of PIAS software is started bij executing the program username.exe, which can be found on the CD-rom or USB stick on which the software is supplied or downloaded from www.sarc.nl/download. After startingthe installation you need to agree with the licence agreement, which is shown on screen. Next step is to choose alocation for the installation of the program and wether or not a shortcut will be created on the desktop. Hereafter,the PIAS programs are installed in the selected folder and the shortcut may be created.

3.2.1 System requirements

PIAS is a MS-Windows programm, and has proven to work properly on Windows desktop versies XP/NT/VIST-A/7/8. According to current hardware standards the memory requirements are rather low; some tens of megabytesof internal (RAM) memory and 1 GB of external memory (hard disc or network) will do. Concerning processortype and processor speed the slogan is ‘the faster, the better’. Furthermore, a dual threading version of PIAS isavailable, obviously the computer must be equipped with a dual core or multi-processor to take advantage.

3.2.2 Sentinel

The PIAS programs are equipped with a hardwarelock, of the brand Rainbow, type Sentinel. These come in threeversions:

• Sentinel C. This is an elder type, delivered until + 2000, intended for the parallel port, and for stand-aloneusage..

• SentinelPro. This is the newer type, from about 2000, and available for parallel and USB ports. Alsointended for stand-alone usage.

• NetSentinel. For network usage, available for parallel and USB.


www.sarc.nl/download

10 Getting started with PIAS

It may occur that the lock cannot be found. A common reason is that the lock is simply not attached to thecomputer, in which case the following message will be given:

• Sentinel C: The hardwarelock has not been plugged into the parallel port or the printer is not online. (note:With this type of Sentinel it can be that if a printer is attached, it must also be switched on.).

• SentinelPro: The SARC SentinelPro has not been plugged into the parallel or USB port.

• NetSentinel: SARC SentinelProNet error: HARDWARELOCK NOT FOUND - The hardwarelock couldnot be found, or the number of PIAS/Fairway licences has exhausted. As the message implies, it can alsomean that no Sentinel network server is available, or that the number of PIAS licences has reached themaximum. See appendix 1 and 2 for more information on the Sentinel Server.

Under Windows XP/NT/2000 and sequels a so-called Sentinel-driver must be used to make the port available.If this driver is not loaded the following message will be given:

• SentinelPro: Superpro init fails: DRIVER NOT INSTALLED - The system device driver was not installedor detected. Communication with the unit was not possible. Please verify that the device driver is properlyloaded.

• SentinelPro: The SARC SentinelPro has not been plugged into the parallel or USB port

• NetSentinel: NO NETSENTINEL SERVERS No security servers can be found on this network.

Such a driver is available with the supplier of the lock, it can be downloaded via www.sarc.nl, see optionLINKS for the URL.

Figure 3.1: Hardware lock (brand Sentinel) for USB port

Figure 3.2: Installation options for USB Net Sentinel Pro


www.sarc.nl

3.3 Manuals and exercises 11

Figure 3.3: Installation options for USB Sentinel Pro

3.2.3 Digitizer

TODO TRANSLATE

If you plan to use a digitizer, you must install the so-called Wintab driver. This driver is provided by themanufacturer of your digitizer, either on CD, disk or Internet.

3.3 Manuals and exercises

The manuals are available in three incarnations, are identical by content:

• One PDF file which contains all chapters, and is called PIASmanual_en.pdf for the english version. It willbe obvious that a PDF-reader is required to open this file.

• HTML pages, viewable with a web browser, e.g. from the manuals page of SARCs website: www.sarc.nl/images/stories/manuals/pias/handleidingENbrowser/index.html.

• A help reader, which is directly accessible from each module, which shows directly the module-specificmanual chapter. This reader (from which an example is presented below) contains also the usual functionssuch as search, select on index words, print etc.

The manual is primarily organized per module, so each module has a dedicated manual chapter where the roleof th emodule, and the several functions and tools are being discussed. It can not be emphasized sufficiently thatrole of the manual is to provide background and support in the use of PIAS. The manual cannot be considered asbeing a course in ship design.


www.sarc.nl/images/stories/manuals/pias/handleidingENbrowser/index.html

www.sarc.nl/images/stories/manuals/pias/handleidingENbrowser/index.html

Figure 3.4: Manual in help reader

PIAS exercises are available at www.sarc.nl/manuals under PIAS and Fairway. In orer to perform theseexercise you need PIAS software.

3.4 Working with PIAS

This section describes the PIAS Main menu en how to start a project from here. Following, standard functions aredescribed as well as the Setup menu that can be started from the taskbar.

Note

Text between < > symbols indicates the letter or name of a keyboard key to be pressed, e.g. <Enter>.Key combinations are typeset with a + as in <Ctrl + Q>, and a sequence of key presses is written as, e.g.,<Alt><C>. A menu option (from the menu bar of the window, or a push buttin in th ewindow) is indicatedwith [Option].

3.4.1 PIAS Main menu

When you start PIAS (with the shortcut on your desktop or, for example, with Explorer), the main menu appearsas shown in the figure PIAS main menu.

Figure 3.5: PIAS main menu


www.sarc.nl/manuals

3.4 Working with PIAS 13

In the main menu, the following actions can be performed:

• You can start a module by double clicking the left mouse button or by hitting <enter> when the mousepointer is above the module button. Each PIAS module opens in its own window, where the standard MS--Windows commands can be applied, such as move, resize, minimize, maximize, restore etc. Also the menusin upper bar of the module’s window act in the standard MS-Windows fashion.

• By clicking the right mouse button, or <F1>, on an module or submenu, the help-reader opens the chaptercorresponding to that specific module or submenu.

• By clicking the SARC-logo with the left mouse button, SARC’s contact information is displayed. By right-clicking the SARC-logo,the PDF-version of the PIAS manual is started.

• At the bottom of the main menu you can specify a fixed project file, which is subsequently used by all PIA-S/Fairway modules. Providing a fixed file is optional, if no fixed file is specified each individual module asksfor the PIAS/Fairway file to be used. Next to the Fixed file name option, there are two more buttons: [Browse],this function can be used to browse your folders, and choose a PIASfiles, and [None] which indicates youdon’t want to use a fixed file name.

The main menu consists of buttons that correspond to a module or a submenu. The modules and their goalsare summarized in the table below.

TO DO VERTALEN TABEL

Module DoelFairway Rompvormontwerp, stroken, visualiseren

en converteren.Hulldef Invoer van romp-gerelateerde zaken,

zoals bestaand spantenraam, openingen,appendages, deklijn en windcontour.

Newlay Invoer van interne geometrie, zoalsschotten, dekken en compartimenten, enberekenen van tanktabellen etc.

Hulltran Rompvormtransformatie.Hydrotables Berekeningen en uitvoer van aan

hydrostatica gerelateerde tabellen, zoalscarene, dwarskrommen, maximumtoelaatbare VCG’ (intact en lek),deadweighttabellen en -schaal en hettrimdiagram van van der Ham.

Loading Invoer beladingstoestanden en berekenenvan intacte stabiliteit, langsscheepsesterkte en deterministische lekstabiliteit.

Probdam Probabilistische lekstabiliteit.Config Algemene projectinstellingen.Diversalia Overige modules, zoals vrijboord,

optredende graanmomenten, tonnage,MARPOL olieuitstroom, langsscheepsetewaterlating en die voor de uitwerkingvan een hellingproef.

Hydrodynamics Weerstandschattingen,schroefberekeningen en menoeuvreren.

3.4.2 Data input with PIAS

3.4.3 Selection screen

3.4.4 Input screen

TODO, doet HJK wel

Figure 3.6: Example of a selection screen

Figure 3.7: Example of an input screen

In general the mouse buttons have the following functions:

• left mouse button, equivalent to <Enter>

• Right mouse button, equivalent to <Esc>

However, it may be that Windows is configured such that a mouse button is not corresponding to the originalfunction.

3.5 Setup

Each module contains the PIAS [Setup] menu. This menu contains the following options (by the way, not the wholelot is relevant to work properly with the software):

• Project Setup

• Program setup

• Print options

• Night colors

• Screen Fonts

• Default Fonts

• Screen colors

• Restore column widths

3.5.1 Project Setup

These setup functions are explained in chapter 5 on page 23, Config: Configurations for hydrostatics, and stabilitycalculations.

3.5 Setup 15

3.5.2 Program setup

Figure 3.8: Programma Setup

TODO hierboven andere screendump zonder die HOMEDIRECTORY knop (die is namelijk vervallen)

Toetsenbord interpretatie Edit.Kruist u deze optie aan dan kunt u in een veld direct selecteren en invullen. De besturingscommando’s, voorzover deze niet met de muis gegeven worden, moeten in combinatie met de <Alt> toets gegeven worden.

Toetsenbord interpretatie Commando.Kruist u deze optie aan dan kunt u een veld pas invullen na een <X> (van eXchange) commando bij elke in-voercel. De besturingscommando’s hoeven echter verder niet met de <Alt> toets gepaard te gaan. Gebruikvan deze instelling wordt trouwens afgeraden, op termijn verdwijnt deze mogelijkheid dan ook.

Uitvoer naar Scherm zwart/wit.Kruist u deze optie aan dan verschijnt de uitvoer naar het scherm in zwart/wit, in plaats van in kleur.

Met grote iconen in toolbar.Hier kan worden vastgelegd of die toolbarbuttons groot of klein moeten zijn.

TODO

3.5.3 Print options

TODO

3.5.4 Night colors

TODO

3.5.5 Screen Fonts

TODO

3.5.6 Default Fonts

TODO

3.5.7 Screen colors

TODO

3.5.8 Restore column widths

TODO


3.6 Definitions and units

Figure 3.9: Definition of draft

Figure 3.10: Definition of length en draft

TODO

3.7 Backups

Quite some PIAS modules have (or will have) a backup system which works with their specific files, but has ageneric way of operation. A typical menu for this functionality is:


3.7 Backups 17

File and backup management

1. Save data on disc

1. Create backup

2. Restore data from backup

3. Import data from other project

4. Quit program without saving the data

3.7.1 Save data on disc

In general the PIAS-modules save their data (on disc) on a regular basis, while with some modules a time intervalcan be given in which the data are saved. This has the advantage that with a sudden failure (a part of) the data aresaved at least. However, one can feel the need to save data explicitly, which is possible with the present option.

3.7.2 Create backup

With this option a backup copy can be made from all data as managed by the particular PIAS module. With thisbackup the time and calender date are also saved. Additionally, a window appears, where a description of thebackup can be given, which will be saved together with the backup.

3.7.3 Restore data from backup

Here a list comes up which shows all backups that are available on the ship directory (which is the folder whichcontains the files of the current project). This can be used for three actions:

• In the last column the first line of the backup description is presented. With an <Enter> on that field thewhole description appears, which can be modified if desired.

• With [restOre] the data of the highlighted text cursor are being restored. It speaks for itself that all currentdata of the current project are overwritten (unless on forehand another backup is created for those data).

• With [Remove] the highlighted backup is permanently erased.

3.7.4 Import data from other project

The previous option is intended to restore data from the current project, with this optio data from an other projectcan be imported. After selecting this option a file browser appears which must be used to select the desired backup.It can be that this backup contains multiple data categories (e.g. ‘frames’, ‘openings’ or ‘wind contour’), in whichcase the user is asked which category or categories to import. By the way, with this import action all current data(of the appropriate category) are replaced, so they are not added or someting alike.

3.7.5 Quit program without saving the data

This option works as it suggests; the current PIAS module is closed, and the invloved files are restored to the stateat the start of the module. All intermediate changes and actions are being discarded with this option, that doesnot only apply to ‘typed in’ changes, but also for restoring or importing backups, and for automatic data saves.However, an exception is made for deliberate manual save actions (e.g. with section 3.7.1 on the current page,Save data on disc), which constitutes a new starting point, and makes that with the present [quit without save] actionth efiles are restored to the content of the moment of this deliberate manual save.


3.8 Closing remarks

Because legislation, hardware capacities and opinions about program design are subject to permanent change, thePIAS software is frequently updated. Consequently, it is strongly recommended to install on a regular basis themost recent software versions. These can be obtained in two ways:

• Order on CD or memorystick at SARC, against cost price.

• Download from www.sarc.nl/download. A login name and password will be supplied on demand.

This chapter ends with some good advices:

• It is recommended to make a backup of your project data on a regular basis.

• PIAS uses the system date and time to check on any changes made since the last session. It is therefore ofvital importance that date and time of your computer are set correctly.

• When this manual refers to criteria from e.g. (inter-)national legislation or classification societies, it isnot meant to replace the original text of those criteria. Good knowledge of up-to-date naval architecturalstandards and common practices is required to use PIAS.



Chapter 4

Installation details

In this chapter additional functions and properties of PIAS are described. A common user can safely skip this chapter,however, in quest of installation details or specific functions one could benefit from reading this material.

4.1 Sentinel, additional information

4.1.1 Required DLL

TODO

4.1.2 Network Sentinel SuperPro

TODO

4.1.3 Handleiding en utilities

TODO

4.1.4 Possible problems Sentinel

4.2 Digitizer

TODO TRANSLATE

4.3 Temporary files

The PIAS software makes use of temporary files. The use of these files will be unknown to the user unless there isa problem while creating or writing to these temporary files. For example if PIAS tries to create a temporary filein a directory where the user is not allowed to create/write files. The location for temporary files is fully handledby the operating system. The path for the directory designated for temporary files is set as follows:

• The path specified by the TMP environment variable

• The path specified by the TEMP environment variable, if TMP is not defined

• The Windows directory, if both TMP and TEMP are not defined


20 Installation details

4.4 ASCII text file

4.4.1 Output in multiple languages

4.5 Export of results

Results of PIAS can be exported to file (see ?? on page ??, config.config_general_15) or to Windows’ clipboard.The user can choose from a number of standard formats, which will be discussed here briefly:

TextThis is the simplest output, just plain ASCII text, without drawings and without attributes for font types,font sizes, paper sizes etc. This format can be read by every text editor or spreadsheet program. However,many details will be lost.

Tabbed textAlmost identical to the Text format, albeit that multiple spaces have been replaced by ‘Tab’ characters. Thisenables some spreadsheet programs to separate multiple figures on one line into spreadsheet columns.

ImageWith this format a graphical map of a page is generated. This map contains all font types, character at-tributes and of course all possible plots. However, the disadvantage of this format is that characters arenot recognized by many receiving applications, so, for example, text modification with a text editor willnot be possible in many cases. In this area MS Word is a little smarter than some other editors, because itrecognizes the characters and enables their manipulation.

Rich Text FormatRich Text Format (RTF) is a Microsoft-defined format, which is suitable to transfer documents betweentext editors, or to generate documents for text editors. RTF is supported by Star Office, MS-Word andWindows’ Wordpad. With RTF the entire output of PIAS can be sent to a text editor. The RTF specificationcan be found on http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/office/aa140277%28v=office.

10%29.aspx.

4.6 Environment variables

4.6.1 List of environment variables

4.7 Key sequence macro’s

4.8 Macro commands for PIAS and Fairway

Macro control for of PIAS or Fairway is only applicable in very rare cases, where the program is controlled by another computer program. In normal use, or for a regular user, this mechanism is not applicable. Consequently, thissection is only available in Dutch. An English translation can be furnished on demand.

4.A Appendix: Speed enhancing mechanisms in PIAS: PIAS/ES

A characteristic of our naval architectural profession is that we often encounter intensive calculation tasks. Al-though the computer serves us well in this area for decades already, the processing time may still be a bottleneck,also because man has adapted himself to the increased processing power, and demands more extended calculationsthan without the computer would have been the case. This mechanism also manifests itself with PIAS, so it isworthwhile to strive for an optimized calculation process. For that purpose PIAS is equipped with two mech-anisms which increase the speed, namely minimization of disc usage and dualthreading. These options, whichare further discussed below, are offered combined in a package with the name PIAS /ES, where ES stands forEnhanced Speed.


http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/office/aa140277%28v=office.10%29.aspx

http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/office/aa140277%28v=office.10%29.aspx

4.A Appendix: Speed enhancing mechanisms in PIAS: PIAS/ES 21

4.A.1 Minimization of disc usage

Like any substantial computer program PIAS uses disc files for the storage of permanent data. Additionally,internal intermediate results are stored in temporary files. Unfortunately, we have experienced that the disc per-formance gets slower as the operating system version gets newer. Under Windows 95 disc IO is slower than underMS-DOS, XP is slower than ’95, and this process seems to continue occasionally to Win7. One even succeededto nullify the strongly increased speed of hardware and networks, quite an achievement indeed. This effect didgradually lead to considerable slower PIAS performance. At SARC we have been experimenting with the setupof the operating system or the network, however, without significant improvement. We also have not found properdocumentation which describes this problem or suggests a remedy. Because apparently the problem is intractablewe decided to work around it. For that purpose an alternative mechanism was designed, where the disc usageis minimized and the intermediate results are kept as much as possible in RAM memory. In technical terms aRAM-cache is placed between the program and the disc.

4.A.2 Dualthreading

This option utilizes the computer technology that has become generally available in the years 2004-2006. For along time past a PC generally has one processor, while this processor contains one core. That implies that thecomputer can process one task at a time (although the operating system may fool you, and give the impressionthat multiple tasks are processed simultaneously). However, there is a tendency where a computer is equippedwith multiple real or virtual processors (which are multi-processor and multi-core machines respectively). So,this technology enables a program to execute tasks parallel, but the software will have to be adapted for thatfacility, where tasks which are suitable for simultaneous processing are explicitly offered to the processor forparallel processing. That implies that for every function of a software package it must be considered whether ornot it is suitable for parallel processing, and it must be adapted accordingly, if appropriate. Limiting ourselvesto PIAS, many tasks can be recognized which can be processed parallel, such as calculating damage stability formultiple angles of inclination, or drawing hull lines with Fairway. On the other hand, there are also jobs whichare not suitable, such as the calculation of intermediate stages of flooding, where at first the final stage mustbe determined, whereupon the water level which corresponds to the filling percentage can be calculated. Thefollowing subjects have been implemented:

• At all intact and damage stability calculations: the computation of stability, simultaneously for all angles ofinclination (except for the first angle).

• At probabilistic damage stability: the computation of the probability of damage by means of numericalintegration (by applying multiple integration lines simultaneously).

• At Newlay the computation of the several intersections between bulkheads and/or compartment boundaries.

4.A.3 Total speed gain

As indicated, for the dualthreading option the acceleration gain can be motivated upon. Concerning the possiblegain of processing speed of the other option, no general statement can be made. It depends on the combination ofcomputer, Windows version, network hardware and network software. For a specific configuration one will haveto a bit of experimenting, SARC can cannot provide advice in this field.


22 Installation details


Chapter 5

Config: Configurations for hydrostatics, and stabilitycalculations

With this module parameters for calculations and presentation can be set. Most parameters have a default value. Theycan be modified at any time, but it is not necessary. These configurations are specific for each project and therefore savedper project. Please be sure to have set the desired configurations before performing a calculation.

5.1 Main menu

Settings for (project name)

1. General setup for stability calculations

2. Angles of inclination for stability calculations

3. Trims for hydrostatics, cross-curves and maximum VCG’

4. Setup for hydrostatics, cross-curves and maximum VCG’

5. Setup for loading conditions

6. Setup for longitudinal strength

7. Setup for damage stability calculations

8. Setup for compartments and tank sounding tables

9. Definition of frame spaces

10. E-mail settings

After choosing one of the options, an input screen or other menu appears which will be explained below.


24 Config: Configurations for hydrostatics, and stability calculations

5.1.1 General setup for stability calculations

General setup for PIAS

1. 1.1 output language

2. 1.2 Name of "light ship" in loading conditions

3. 1.3 Stability with the free to trim effect (constant LCG)

4. 1.4 (Damage) stability including shift of COG’s of tank contents

5. config_general_5

6. 1.6 Wave characteristics for hydrostatics and stability calculations

7. 1.7 Location of the top of the wave

8. 1.8 1.9 Wave length for stability calculations

9. 1.9 Wave direction

10. config_general_10






5.1.1.1 1.1 output language

Here the language used for out output of calculations etc. is set.

5.1.1.2 1.2 Name of ”light ship” in loading conditions

The module Loading: loading conditions, stability and longitudinal strength (discussed on page 145) always printsan item in the loading conditions which represents the total light ship weight, as combined of distinct items fromthe ’common list’. The name of this item can be specified here.

5.1.1.3 1.3 Stability with the free to trim effect (constant LCG)

Answer this question with ’yes’ to have stability calculated with a constant LCG. Cross-curves are calculated withthe initial trim at a heeling angle of zero degrees. When the vessel heels the actual trim is calculated for eachheeling angle so that the longitudinal centre of gravity equals the longitudinal centre of buoyancy. If you answerwith ’no’ the trim will be constant, and equal to the initial trim, for all heeling angles.

5.1.1.4 1.4 (Damage) stability including shift of COG's of tank contents

The conventional way to take free surfaces into account is by correcting the vertical centre of gravity by a virtualincrease due to the free surface(s) at heeling angle zero. This virtual increase of the actual VCG is taken constantat all heeling angles. However, in reality the free surface effects change due to heel and trim. If this option isanswered with ’No’, the (damage) stability is calculated in the traditional way with a VCG correction which isconstant for all heeling angles.

If this option is set to ’Yes’, and if this option has been purchased, then for every compartment containinga liquid the actual centre of gravity is calculated at the actual heeling angle and trim at the intact stability anddamage stability modules (chapter 240 and chapter 290). Please be aware of the following consequences:

• Tables of maximum allowable VCG’ are no longer valid while the virtual centre of gravity G’ has becomemeaningless.

• Centres of gravity and free surface moments printed in loading conditions do NOT have to correspond withthe input data. Due to heel and trim the centres of gravity may have shifted and the surface of the liquidmay have a different shape than at zero heel and trim.


5.1 Main menu 25

• All weight items that refer to liquid cargo have to be read from the tank capacity tables, see chapter 210.

• Weight items which do have a free surface moment but which are not read from a tank capacity table arenot allowed.

5.1.1.5 config general

PIAS can perform hydrostatic calculations and (damage-)stability calculations on the basis of two representations:

• A wireframe model, which essentially consists of cross sections or ordinates, and which e.g. can be de-fined with PIAS’ module for manual or digitizer input of an existing hull form (module 70). A file with awireframe model has the extension .HYD.

• A solid model, which is essentially a description of the hull surface (including information about what isinside and what is outside), which can be produced by PIAS’ Fairway hull design and fairing module. Afile with a solid model has the extension .TRI. In general, a solid model is more flexible than a wireframemodel. It also gives more possibilities, e.g. in the area of the geometric composition of compartments fromelementary building blocks (the so-called sub compartments).

5.1.1.6 1.6 Wave characteristics for hydrostatics and stability calculations

All hydrostatics and stability calculations can also be executed for the ship in a wave. According to the figure thewave amplitude, the position of the top of the wave and the wave length must be defined. To perform calculationswithout a wave, please enter zero to all these parameters. Please bear in mind that for damage stability calculationsthe wave does NOT extend within the damaged compartments!.

5.1.1.7 1.7 Location of the top of the wave

see also section 5.1.1.6 on this page, 1.6 Wave characteristics for hydrostatics and stability calculations

5.1.1.8 1.8 1.9 Wave length for stability calculations

see also section 5.1.1.6 on the current page, 1.6 Wave characteristics for hydrostatics and stability calculations

5.1.1.9 1.9 Wave direction






26 Config: Configurations for hydrostatics, and stability calculations



5.1.2 Angles of inclination for stability calculations

5.1.3 Trims for hydrostatics, cross-curves and maximum VCG'

5.1.4 Setup for hydrostatics, cross-curves and maximum VCG'

5.1.5 Setup for loading conditions

5.1.6 Setup for longitudinal strength

5.1.7 Setup for damage stability calculations

5.1.8 Setup for compartments and tank sounding tables

5.1.9 Definition of asymmetrical hull forms and composed hull forms

5.1.10 Definition of keel plate thickness and slope of keel line

5.1.11 Definition of frame spaces

5.1.12 Definition of draft marks

5.1.13 E-mail settings


Chapter 6

Fairway: hull shape design

Fairway is the hullform modelling module of the PIAS/Fairway suite of naval architectural software. Fairway can be usedfor any activity with the hullform, such as:

• Hullform generation, both ab initio design and based on a pre-existing shape, in which developable surfaces anddoubly curved surfaces may be mixed.

• Design modifications during preliminary design and final design.

• Hullform transformation.

• Fairing with user-controllable accuracy, up to, and beyond production tolerances.

• Generation of shell plate expansions.

• Generation of linesplans and tactile scale models (Rapid Prototyping).

• Import or digitization of hullform data, either complete or partial.

• Perform simple hydrostatic analyses, and farm out complex analyses to the PIAS suite.

• Addition of extra, user defined curves, for example extra frames.

• Export of hullforms, for example to AutoCAD (DXF), Microstation (IGES), NUPAS, and software for finite element(FE) or computational fluid dynamics (CFD) calculations.


28 Fairway: hull shape design

Besides complex hullforms, Fairway can also be used efficiently for simple shapes like tanks. These forms can beexported to a regular PIAS-format, to execute calculations and compose hullforms.

6.1 Introduction

Fairway is a so-called solid modeller, based on lines. This introduction starts with a description of some basicconcepts, followed by a set of geometrical definitions used in this manual.

6.1.1 Basics of Fairway

1. A line consists of one or more concatenated curves. In Fairway this is called a polycurve. The user specifiesthe nature of the connections between the curves (fair, tangential or with a knuckle).

2. Curves are defined as NURBS, and the user can specify the curve type as:

(a) Spline

(b) Straight line

(c) Circular arc

(d) Parabolic, hyperbolic or elliptical arc.

3. Points are defined along the length of a curve. This can be intersection points with other curves, and so-called internal points used to anchor the shape of the curve. An important objective is to keep the distancebetween points and curves below a certain tolerance.

4. The fairness of a curve can be inspected by means of the curvature, plotted perpendicularly to the curve.Curves can be faired through its points automatically with a local scheme, where the user specifies a meandeviation between the original points and the faired curve. The user can also specify the relative weight ofeach individual point, in three grades: neutral, inactive and heavy. The mean deviation is analogous to thestiffness of the physical spline (the larger the deviation, the stiffer the spline), while the relative weight canbe considered as a model for the weights of the so-called ducks.

5. Polycurves are connected to each other through the intersection points of point 3, and thereby form a networkthat describes the hull surface. Contrary to NURBS surfaces, which only exist over a regular network, this


6.1 Introduction 29

network is very shapeable. This is because polycurves need not extend over the full length of the ship, butmay be defined where they are really needed.

6. Polycurves must start and end at another curve, curve ends cannot dangle freely in space.

7. Internally, the network is represented unambiguously with appropriate techniques. Without the use of thesetechniques a set of curves is ambivalent. Fairway, however, knows about the logical coherence between thepoints, curves and surfaces, so Fairway does have an unambiguous and correct picture of the object. Togetherwith the methods from points 10 and 11, a solid shape representation is obtained.

8. When the program is used for hullform generation, the unambiguous representation is present from thestart. When a digitized linesplan is used or a hullshape is imported, the representation will be createdautomatically. In both cases curves can be interpolated, added, removed and manipulated.

9. A network of polycurves is termed “consistent” when all polycurves run through their points within thetolerance mentioned in item 3.

10. With special techniques, Fairway constructs surfaces over the meshes of the network, based on the shapeof neighbouring curves. Areas are automatically detected where it is appropriate to use one surface. Thesurfaces have curvature in two directions, unless the user explicitly specifies that a surface must be devel-opable.

11. Individual surfaces are connected to form a contiguous shell with tangential continuity, unless a curve isdefined as a chine.

12. In this way a complete, unambiguous surface description is made, on which the following actions can beperformed:

(a) Interpolation of all kinds of intersections.

(b) Showing threedimensional views, with or without hidden line or hidden surface removal.

(c) Calculating intersections with other surfaces, or perform boolean operations with other objects.

13. The surface is defined by the curves from item 1. If a surface is shaped insatisfactorily, then the network ofcurves should be adjusted.

14. If the tangent continuity from item 11 is not sufficient at some locations, extra curves should be added acrossthat area, which de facto makes the continuity shift to fair.

The eventual goal will be a network in which all curves have the desired shape,and in which all the points of the network coincide with those curves.

6.1.2 Geometry

This section deals with a few geometric concepts that are important for using Fairway. No mathematical definitionsand backgrounds are involved, just a simple explanation, if necessary illustrated with some graphical examples.Firstly some geometric definitions regarding lines are given, followed by definitions regarding planes.

6.1.2.1 Lines

CurveA curve is a line segment, straight or curved, without knuckles or cusps.

PolycurveA polycurve is a concatenation of one or more curves. Initially, curves are independent from each other,so there will be a knuckle in the polycurve where two curves meet. By defining boundary conditions onecan achieve various forms of transition between curves, which creates a dependency of shape at start- andend-points of adjacent curves.



KnuckleA knuckle is a point between two adjacent curves of a polycurve. These two curves are initially independentfrom each other.

ChineA chine is a polycurve on which crossing polycurves have a knuckle. It is recommended to connect knuckleswith a chine. In Fairway chines are often visualized thicker than other polycurves.

SplineA Spline is a possibly curved line which is defined by several angular points. These angular points arecalled vertices (a single angular point is called a vertex). These vertices together make up a so-calledcontrol polygon. The line, as a matter of speaking, is attracted by the control polygon. You might say thatthe spline is a fair approximation of the control polygon. By changing the vertices the shape of the splinecan be manipulated.

Line direction, left and rightIn Fairway a polycurve has a certain direction. For example, the possible directions of a waterline are from’stern to bow’ or from ’bow to stern’. Fairway visualizes the direction of selected polycurves by means ofan animation that reminds of waterdroplets that run along the line in the direction of the polycurve.In relation to this, left and right are defined in Fairway as follows: imagine yourself walking on the outside ofthe ship, perpendicular to the shell, on the line from the beginning to the end of the line. From this positionFairway’s left is at your left hand, and right at your right hand.

Radius of curvatureFor each point of a curved line it is possible to imagine a circle which coincides with the line in the con-sidered point. The radius of this ’fitting’ circle is called the radius of curvature. In the figure the radius ofcurvature (R) is illustrated.

R

R

R

Figure 6.1: Radius of curvature R.

CurvatureThe curvature of a curve in a considered point is defined as the reciprocal of the radius of curvature, 1/R.

Curvature plotIn Fairway the curvature is used as a tool for fairing curves. For each point of a line the curvature can beplotted perpendicularly to the considered curve, the curvature plot. A curve can be considered fair if thecurvature plot is without unexpected jumps. Two examples are given below. The wild sagging in the left plotis unintended and indicates that the curve is not fair at that location. On the right the plot is discontinuousas is to be expected, between the straight lines (no curvature) and the circular arc (constant curvature).


6.1 Introduction 31

Figure 6.2: Curvature plot.

Moving pointsA point can only be moved in the plane in which the polycurve of the point is defined. A point on a framecan be moved both in vertical and transverse direction. A point on a spatial polycurve can be moved inall directions. For points in which polycurves of different type intersect the following degrees of freedomarise.

P1

P2P3

P6

P5

P4

framewaterline

buttock

transverse axis

vertical axis

longitudinal axis

hoogte-as

transverse axis

longitudinal axis

framewaterline

buttock

spatial curve

spatial curve

Figure 6.3: Degrees of freedom.

P1 : only transverse motion possible P4 : transverse and vertical motionpossible

P2 : only vertical motion possible P5 : longitudinal and vertical motionpossible

P3 : only longitudinal motion possible P6 : transverse and longitudinal motionpossible

Fairway manages the degrees of freedom and will offer you the available directions of motion.

6.1.2.2 Planes

Face / surfaceThe manual mentions faces and surfaces. A face is the smallest area generated by intersecting lines in 3Dspace; faces are the meshes of the network of curves. A surface is an area defined by the user, boundedby intersecting lines. A surface can have certain properties, like, for example, developability. No lines canexist within a face. They can exist within a surface, as the surface may consist of several faces.

Developable surfacesDevelopable surfaces are surfaces that are curved in one direction only. Conic surfaces are the only devel-opable surfaces. This includes cylindrical surfaces, as these can ge seen as cones with a top at infinity. Two



kinds of developable surfaces can be distinguished: single-top cones and multi-top cones. The cones mayhave any base.A single-top cone is generated by moving a straight line about a single point in 3D space. This single pointis the top of the cone. The straight line is called the ruling.

cone top

definingchines

ruling

developable plate

A multi-top cone can be described as a cone with a shifting top. This top moves along a curved line in3D space. Each ruling of the cone is a tangent of this curved line at the corresponding top. If a linesplanwith developable surfaces is made by hand, the use of multi-top cones is often too complicated. By usingmulti-top cones it is possible to create complex developable surfaces. When working with Fairway, the userneeds not worry about the details of cones and tops, but only indicates the curves that bound the developablesurface. Fairway calculates and displays the result.

spatial curve ofcone tops

definingchines

developable plate

rulings

A condition for a surface to be developable is that all rulings must exist. The rulings are not allowed tocross and no ’holes’ between the rulings are allowed. Crossing rulings and holes are illustrated in thefigures below.

Not developable: the rulings cross Not developable: gap between the rulings

Figure 6.4: Unalowed conditions of rulings.


6.2 Start and main menu 33

Defining lines of a developable surfaceThe defining lines of a surface are the two boundary lines inbetween which the rulings run. These lines arecalled defining lines because only these lines determine the shape of a developable surface. The defininglines must always be chines. No knuckles are allowed on the chine.If a developable surface is defined by the rulings from one fixed cone top (single-top cone) or if a cylindricaldevelopable surface is defined, only one defining boundary line can be specified.

DomainA domain is a closed area with specific properties. For example, in case of developable surfaces the propertyis developability. The user can define a domain by defining its bounding polycurves.

The figures below illustrate a developable surface. The first figure gives a 3D view of a completely developablehull shape. The bottom plate has been selected for processing. The chine and the stem contour are the definingborderlines. You can see the rulings on the bottom plate. The lower figure shows the developed bottom plate.

6.2 Start and main menu

Fairway can be started by choosing in the main PIAS menu the option [Hullform definition] and then submenu [Fairway:Lines design and fairing].

After starting Fairway, the filename of the project is asked. When you start a new Fairway project, type in thename (and path) for the project. Next the following menu will appear:

New Fairway project (file filename)

Start with new hull design (minimal hull)

Start with new hull design (rectangular barge)

Import hull form from existing PIAS file

Import hull form from SXF file

Start with new hull design (horizontal cylinder with R=B/2)

When choosing "Start with new hull design..." the following menu will appear:



Design main dimensions

Projectname

Length PP

Moulded breadth

Moulded draft

Moulded depth

Blok coefficient (optional target value)

Center of Buoyancy (% of Lpp from Lpp/2) (optional target value)

Midship coefficient (optional target value)

After entering the main dimensions in this menu, if the first option was chosen, a initial model will be generatedby Fairway (with the specified main dimensions), containing one deck line, one stem/stern contour and one frame.With the second option a rectangular barge of the correct main dimensions is created, with the last option a cylinfer.

This model is the base for subsequent actions. Values for the block coefficient, LCB and midship coefficient areused as target values for the sectional area curves. These values are not necessarily equal to the final hydrostaticparticulars, it is up to the user to achieve those values, with the aid of the controlling mechanisms that Fairwayoffers.

After the hull is read into Fairway the following main menu appears:

PIAS Fairway

1. Graphical User Interface (GUI)

2. Name, dimensions and coefficients

3. File and solid management

4. Settings and miscellaneous

5. Show (rendered and colored) surfaces

6. Export of hullform

7. Define/draw lines plan

8. Hullform transformation

9. Domains and surfaces

10. Legacy GUI

11. Alphanumerical manipulation

12. Manipulate groups of line places

Besides this main menu the following options are available in the menu bar:

SetupIn the [Setup] menu, general PIAS settings can be specified. The details of suboption [Project Setup] arediscussed in chapter 5 on page 23, Config: Configurations for hydrostatics, and stability calculations.

HelpThe [Help] option will give a help window explaining the available menubar options and provides remarksabout the current menu option.

QuitWith the [Quit] option the current window is closed. When you choose [Quit] in the main menu, you willleave Fairway.

MemoryThe [Memory] option will show the free memory space available. In DOS this option was once used to checkif sufficient memory is left.


6.3 Graphical User Interface (GUI) 35

Attention

In some Fairway pop-up boxes input is asked, for example when you want to print. You can close a box likethis using either of the following two options:

1. [OK]: You confirm the input as shown in the input fields and continue the process.

2. [Leave]: You return to the default values of the input fields as shown in the fields before you made anychanges, and continue the process. (Thus this function is different from the often used function Cancelbecause the process is not interrupted).

This chapter ends with a set of appendices in Appendices.

6.3 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

This section describes the modern Fairway GUI that was completely redesigned and first released in 2012. Fairway haslong had various user interfaces. It started with an alpha-numerical interface, then it got a graphical user interface inparallel. In addition came an interface for rendering.

The new user interface is developed from the ground up alongside the other interfaces, and it is still possible to switchbetween them without leaving the program. The GUI had its first public release when it was found to be complete enoughfor production purposes. Eventually all functionality from older interfaces will be integrated into the modern GUI, but untilthen those interfaces will stay around to fall back upon. This manual will be adapted as work progresses in the new GUI.

First the general structure of the interface is presented, followed by ways to change the view on the model. Nextthe dragger is introduced, which is a graphical entity for interactive manipulation of 3D positions, specifically designed forFairway. The section continues by documenting the various modelling actions by which the model can be changed, andsupporting functionality. Finally there is a section that you can consult if you encounter problems.

6.3.1 Start up

At start up a progress bar in the status bar indicates how solids are read into the GUI. This process is completedwhen it reads “Ready” in the status bar, and the GUI is responsive to the mouse and keyboard. Curves arerepresented by a course polyline initially in order to get ready for user interaction quickly, and the system continuespreparing for final display accuracy and the curvature information while the user is working with the model. Careis taken that curves that are under the mouse pointer are prioritised, so that these are always displayed at highaccuracy. Because of this task, CPU load can be high for the first moments after loading a large model, but itwill normalize eventually. For configuration of the display accuracy see section 6.6.1.3 on page 70, ConfigurationGUI.

6.3.2 GUI Structure

The GUI consists of a central modelling area, around which various control- and information panels can be posi-tioned, according to the preferences of the user. The menu bar along the top and the status bar along the bottomare the only static elements in the main window, everything else can be repositioned, detached and removed bymeans of drag-and-drop.

6.3.2.1 Modelling Views

The modelling area can be filled with one or more modelling views in various layouts. A new modelling view canbe opened with [Window][new]. When there are several views open in the modelling area, the one under the mousepointer is automatically activated and raised to the front in case of overlapping views. A view can be preventedfrom being occluded by the active view by selecting “Stay on Top” from the drop-down menu under the top lefticon of the view window. View windows may be layed out automatically filling the modelling area by selecting[Window][Tile].

As Fairway has excellent controls for changing the view angle and zoom level in a view window (see sec-tion 6.3.3 on page 39, Navigation: Pan, Zoom and Rotate) many people prefer working in a single maximizedwindow, which you get by clicking on the corresponding button in the top right corner of the view window frame.


Alternatively, several large views may be stacked on top of each other by selecting [Window][Stack]; which giveseach window a tab pane along the top for switching between views.

The projection of the view can be toggled between parallel projection and perspective projection from thecontext menu, by clicking the right mouse button over the view window in question. Since manipulation of curvesin various planes is very well handled in Fairway and independent from the view angle or projection, you may evenprefer to model and manipulate in perspective, as it helps with spatial orientation and to differentiate curves in theforeground from the rest of the model; it is a depth clue.

When the GUI is closed, the view window layout and view angles are stored and restored when the GUI isreopened at a later time.

6.3.2.2 Tree view

The tree view contains a hierarchical list of the elements of a model. It can be shown and hidden from the menu[Window][Tree View], and be repositioned to another location — even another screen if you have one — by draggingits title bar.

The list can be expanded and collapsed by clicking the small triangles to the left of the items, or by doubleclicking the item itself. To expand an item and all its sub-items, select the item and press <*>. The list isautomatically expanded and scrolled when a selection is made graphically, to bring the selection into view on thetree view.

Selections are made with the left mouse button <LMB>. A composed selection is made with <Ctrl+LMB> anda range is selected with <Shift+LMB> or holding <LMB> while dragging over the list. It is also possible to selectall expanded items with <Ctrl+A>.

There are two additional columns in the tree view containing check boxes for visibility and access. If aparticular polycurve is hidden, the visibility check box of its parent solid is filled to indicate that it is not completelyvisible. All hidden items can be shown at once with the menu option All [Display][Unhide All].

The access column controls the active/inactive state of solids, and the lock status of polycurves. Inactive solidschange to a uniform colour and cannot be modified. Polycurves can be in one of three lock states:

1. Unlocked

2. Irremovable

3. Fully locked

An irremovable polycurve can still be modified, but not be deleted. The polycurve lock state is cycled with aclick on its check box.

State changes are recorded in the action history and can be undone and redone, see paragraph 6.3.5.1.1 onpage 43, Undo and redo.

6.3.2.3 Levels of information and control

The Fairway GUI is designed to present both information and control at different levels of interaction, at the righttime, without the user needing to ask for them or to search for them in the menu’s. Controls that are irrelevant tothe task at hand are therefore abscent and cannot cause confusion or distraction.

6.3.2.3.1 Unselected polycurves

Unselected polycurves of active solids are colour coded according to the plane in which they are defined. Chinesare displayed with an increased line width. The colours and widths can be configured according to your preferencesfrom the menu [Edit][Preferences...][Curves]. Polycurves that are part of inactive solids are uniformly displayed inthe inactive colour. In short, the following information is available at first sight:

• Whether a polycurve is part of an active solid.

• Whether a polycurve is a frame, waterline, buttock, diagonal, planar or spatial polycurve.

• Whether it is a chine or regular polycurve.

6.3.2.3.2 Prelit polycurves

When the mouse pointer is moved over the model, polycurves under it will light up in a distinct colour, the prelightcolour (yellow by default). This is done for two reasons.

Firstly, it aids the user in making selections. It hints which curve or polycurve will be selected if the leftmouse button would be pressed. In case of an ambiguity, when there are more than one polycurves under thecursor, all will light up and at mouse press a pop-up will differentiate the items. If selection of the prelit polycurveis prohibited in the current modelling context, e.g., when attempting to delete a locked polycurve, then it will beprelit using the prohibited colour (red by default). The reason why selection is prohibited is given in the statusbar.

Secondly, prelighting reveals more information about the polycurve:

• Knuckles are displayed with a small circle, showing the subdivision into curves.

• The existence of boundary condistions at the knuckles are indicated, by displaying tangents with dottedlines.

• A curvature plot indicates the fairness of the polycurve, if switched on ( [Display][Curvature Plots][CurvaturePlot] or by means of the tool bar [Window][Curvature Plots]). The plot is constructed by setting out thecurvature value perpendicularly to the curve. The scale of the plot can be adjusted with the <Up> and<Down> arrow keys.

• The single curve directly under the mouse cursor is further accented with additional information:

– The vertices that define the shape of the spline.

– The points through which the spline is faired.

* Inactive points are marked with an outlined arrow pointing upwards.

* Heavy points are marked with a solid arrow pointing downwards.

• In the status bar the currently prelit curve is identified with

– The name of the solid.

– The name of the polycurve, as well as its position (when applicable).

– The type of the curve and its running number.

– If the curve has a defined master curve, that curve is identified between braces.

6.3.2.3.3 Selected Polycurves

Polycurves, consisting of curves, can be selected on two levels. Firstly the polycurve as a whole can be selected,and secondly a curve as an individual can be selected. If a curve is selected, its parent polycurve is always selectedas well. Selections can be made in the modelling area as well as in the Tree view (discussed on the facing page).A compound selection can be made by holding the <Ctrl> key, or by dragging over items in the tree view.

The current modelling context may limit the freedom to make selections. For example, when deleting poly-curves it is not possible to select curves, and when manipulating a curve then a compound selection is not possible.

A selected curve or polycurve is highlighted using an animation reminding of a string of droplets running alongthe line or of marching ants. The speed of this animation can be configured with the value of Dash animation speedin [Edit][Preferences...][Curves]. Apart from giving a visual distinction, the animation serves an important functionalpurpose:

• The direction of the polycurve is indicated (for the definition of polycurve direction see section 6.1.2.1 onpage 29, Lines).

Moving dashes are also practical, as they do not permanently obstruct the view on details of the drawing.There is a second set of defined colours, associated with the curve type: Spline, straight line, circular arc and

(other) conic arc. A selected curve is displayed in this colour, with ants in the prelight colour. Other parts of aselected polycurve are coloured normally, but ants are coloured according to the type of the underlying curve.

Furthermore, points and vertices of selected curves become “hot”, meaning that they themselves light up whenthe mouse pointer is positioned over them. When clicked, a Change the shape of a curve (discussed on page 43)action is started, allowing points and vertices to be dragged instantly.

If switched on, curvature plots also show on selected polycurves. If a set of consecutive polycurves is selectedin parallel planes, which is easiest done from the tree view (discussed on page 36), a plot appears on each of them.This visualises curvature transitions across curves, which can be a valuable insight. You way want to enable colourcoding of the curvature plot, so overlapping plots can still be read, using [Edit][Preferences...][Curves][Curvature].

Figure 6.5: Curvature plots on a sequence of selected polycurves, coloured according to curvature gradient.

6.3.2.4 Keyboard operation

At SARC we have a focus on keeping mouse travel distances low, and the previous Fairway GUI was known forits keyboard shortcuts and the swift operation they allowed. Even though the current GUI has more buttons anddials than its predecessor, we have maintained our commitment and the keyboard is still a fully supported controldevice.

The menu bar is activated through the <Alt> key like you are used to, after which mnemonics are displayedfor the keys that activate the menu items. Some items like [File][Save], [Edit][Undo] and [Edit][Redo] can be activatedwithout opening the menu, by pressing the shortcut key combination that is displayed to the right of the item inthe menu.

As discussed in section 6.3.5 on page 42, Modelling actions, many modelling actions bring up a dedicatedpanel with relevant controls and information. This action panel stands out visually with a distinct backgroundcolour, so it is easily located on the screen. Most controls on the action panel have a corresponding item in thecontext menu, which can be brought up with a click on the right mouse button in a modelling view. Wheneverthe context menu is up, hotkeys are displayed over the controls on the action panel, so they are easily memorisedwhile using the program. These keys are “hot” whenever the control is visible, unless an input field has keyboardfocus. Pressing a hotkey simulates activation of the associated control on the action panel.

6.3.2.4.1 Numerical input

Fields for numerical input always show the unit of the number, unless it is dimensionless. If digits are selectedin the field, then these are replaced instantly upon the first key-press. Double-clicking selects the digits before orafter the decimal mark, and a third click selects the entire number.

Different geographical regions use different formats for the notation of numbers. Fairway balances adherence tothe local format and flexibility of input in the following way. Numbers are displayed without thousands separators,with a decimal mark as set in the number format setting of your operating system. This setting also affects theinterpretation of number input: If “,” is a thousands separator, then it is simply ignored. Otherwise, both “,” and“.” are interpreted as decimal marks. If the input contains more than one decimal mark then the input is truncatedjust before the second mark upon the press of <Enter>. Summarizing:

• Do not use thousands separators.

Pan Zoom Rotate<MMB> <Ctrl + MMB> Wheel <Shift + MMB>

<MMB + RMB> <MMB + LMB><F4><LMB><F4> <F4><Ctrl + LMB><F4> <F4><Shift + LMB><F4>3Dconnexion navigation device

Table 6.1: Navigation quick reference table

• If “,” is a decimal mark, you are free to use “.” as a decimal mark as well.

Often, real numbers are displayed in reduced precision to save space on screen, but when they are being editedthe field may expand to reveal more digits. This allows the number to be inspected and edited at a higher precision.

If small arrow buttons are shown next to the field then these may be clicked (and held) to change the value inpredefined small steps. The same can be accomplished by pressing the <Up> and <Down> arrow keys. Biggersteps are made with the <Page Up> and <Page Down> keys. A third way of adjusting numbers is by rolling themouse wheel over an input field. If you do that while holding the <Ctrl> key, then bigger steps are used. For thisit is not necessary to click on the field first, it suffices to place the mouse pointer over the field and start rolling.

6.3.3 Navigation: Pan, Zoom and Rotate

Panning, zooming and rotating is collectively known under the term navigation. Fairway provides several inter-faces for navigation, all of which are designed to not interfere with actions for selection and manipulation. Thatis, no operation must be interrupted or cancelled for navigation. When used in isolation, the following alwaysapplies:

• The left mouse button <LMB> is used for selection and manipulation.

• The middle mouse button <MMB> is used for navigation.

• The right mouse button <RMB> brings up the context menu.

If you don’t have a mouse with a middle button you can use the Navigation mode (discussed on page 41). Ifthe middle mouse button does not work then try to troubleshoot it (discussed on page 65).

6.3.3.1 Orientation

The current view direction is always displayed in the title bar of the view as two angles: one is the view directionrelative to the centre plane and the other relative to the base plane. If the view direction happens to be perpendicularto one of the main planes, then this is also indicated in words.

The orientation of the model relative to the viewer is indicated by the set of orientation axes displayed in thelower right corner of the view window. The positive length, breadth and height directions are each represented byan indicidually coloured arrow. The orientation axes can be switched on and off and colours can be customized in[Edit][Preferences...][General][Orientation axes].

6.3.3.2 Panning

Panning brings different parts of the model into view. Panning is possible in these ways:

• Press <MMB> and drag.

• Click and release the <MMB> to pan the clicked location to the middle of the modelling area.

6.3.3.3 Zooming

Zooming happens in the direction underneith the mouse cursor. Zooming is possible in these ways:

• Press and hold <MMB> and <Ctrl>, then drag up or down.

• Press and hold <MMB> first, followed by <RMB>, then drag up or down.

• Wheel up or down.

• Zoom in on a curve with just a click on the curve (<MMB + Ctrl> or <MMB + RMB>), without dragging.

• Zoom all with a click in the background (<MMB + Ctrl> or <MMB + RMB>), without dragging. If you rotateafter having done this, the zoom level is adjusted on the fly to make the model fill the view, until you pan orzoom explicitly.

6.3.3.4 Rotating

Rotating the camera around the model is possible in these ways:

• Press and hold <MMB> and <Shift>, then drag.

• Press and hold <MMB> first, followed by <LMB>, then drag.

• View a planar polycurve in-plane with just a click on the polycurve (<MMB + Shift> or <MMB + LMB>).Click the same polycurve once more to rotate 180 degrees.

The center of rotation is set to the center of the visible part of the bounding box of the model. When draggingthe mouse from left to right the camera rotates around a vertical axis. When dragging away or towards you thecamera tilts around its horizontal axis, whilst keeping the center of rotation in view.

6.3.3.4.1 Spinning

If, while rotating, the <MMB> is released in the middle of a dragging motion, then the camera will continue toorbit around the rotation center.

6.3.3.5 Perspective views

The view projection can be toggled between orthographic and perspective using the context menu, or with <Ctrl +Shift + P>. In perspective views, panning rotates the camera around its own center, synonimous with the conceptof panning in photography. But zooming is replaced with dollying, meaning that the camera position movesforward or backward. By combining pan and dolly it is thereby possible to “walk” or “fly” through the model inperspective projection. And because dollying happens in the direction under the mouse pointer (as is zooming)it is possible to translate the camera sideways without changing its orientation by dollying in and out in differentdirections.

6.3.3.6 3Dconnexion navigation device

Fairway has built-in support for the 6-degree of freedom navigation devices from 3Dconnexion, making it possibleto pan, zoom and rotate simultaneously in one smooth motion. The SpaceNavigator devices have two buttons. Theleft button resets the view to view all of the model, the right button brings up the device configuration panel.

If you have trouble using the navigation device then try to troubleshoot it (discussed on page 65).

6.3.3.7 Navigation mode

In navigation mode, the left mouse button acts as the middle mouse button, so that it can be used for navigation.Toggle the navigation mode on and off in either of the following ways:

• Press <F4>

• Select the menu [Display][Navigation Mode]

• Click the “hand” icon in the toolbar. If the icon is not visible, select the menu [Window][Navigation].

6.3.4 The dragger: interactive graphical positioning

Whenever a position can be manipulated graphically, a so-called dragger appears in the modelling views. Itconsists of one or more arrows contained in a translucent sphere that loosely resembles a soap bubble. This spheremarks the dragger “hotspot”: to interact with the dragger you need not aim precisely at the arrows, it suffices toclick on the hotspot and start dragging.

Figure 6.6: Dragger with status information.

The dragger snaps to a movable entity such as a point or vertex, and thereby gives a handle on its position. Ifthere are more than one movable entities in the view, then the dragger jumps to the one that is nearest to the mousepointer, so it is easy to switch focus between them.

Whenever a dragger is present, its three-dimensional coordinates are displayed in the right end of the statusbar, along with a concise usage instruction.

The arrows of the dragger indicate the positive directions of the freedom of motion. If there is just one arrowthen it can only be dragged linearly along a single axis. If there are two arrows then dragging is possible in theplane that contains the arrows, which is also indicated by a small square at the centre of the dragger. If the draggeris snapped on an entity that is free to be positioned in three dimensions, then this is indicated by a third orthogonalarrow. The third arrow is transparent to indicate that it is inactive. By holding the mouse pointer over the hotspotand pressing <Ctrl> you switch to a different pair of arrows, changing the plane of motion. The square in themiddle marks the current plane.

If a dragger has more than one arrows, you can constrain motion linearly along one of the arrows by holding<Shift> while pressing the mouse button. This selects the arrow that is closest to the mouse pointer, as indicatedby a dash-dotted line.

Sometimes an entity’s freedom of motion does not coinside with the main axes, as is the case for points on acurve that is defined in an oblique plane. In that case, arrows are displayed that each are contained in the obliqueplane and one of the main planes. These are then coloured according to the respective main plane. So if, forexample, you would hold <Shift> and drag the waterline-coloured arrow (red by default) you would move thedragger horizontally. Draggers of this type can have three arrows, but they are all coplanar. Also, the plane in themiddle of the dragger is cropped by a cube, making it possibly six-sided, so its edges still run parallel to the mainplane, helping you to interpret its orientation.

So the direction of motion is independent from the view direction; it is solely under the control of the dragger.There is a chance however, that one arrow is close to parallel with the view direction, or that the view directionis close to being collinear with the current plane of the dragger. This could cause excessive translation in the


view direction, and to prevent that, motion is automatically constrained to the other arrow if there is one, or fullyconstrained otherwise. An arrow that is made inactive this way will be transparent to indicate that freedom ofmotion does exist in that direction, but that the view direction must be changed before it can be moved accordingly.Also, whenever a dragger is being dragged while there is a view-induced constraint, an attention notice is given inthe status bar.

6.3.5 Modelling actions

When we at SARC redesigned the Fairway GUI we made an inventory of the ways in which a model can be changed,and clustered them into a smaller number of modelling actions. This has resulted in a clean user interface that isto a high degree self-explaining, and it has enabled us to implement some very powerful features, some of whichare quite unique.

This section opens with an introduction to the common functionalities of actions, and continues with a docu-mentation of each individual action:

• Change the shape of a curve

• New Planar Polycurve by Intersection

• Move polycurve

• Remove Polycurve

• Properties of polycurves

• Curve Properties

• Systemize polycurve names

• Join polycurves

• Split polycurve

• Connect Points

• Generate Fillet Points

• Show Indicative Intersections

• Change the shape of the SAC

6.3.5.1 Common functionality

When you start an action from the menu bar, an action-specific panel comes up, easily identified with its distinctbackground colour. Many actions require a selection of one or more items to act upon, and the panel will tellyou to make a selection when needed. Selections can be made graphically or from the tree view (discussed onpage 36). You can also make a selection first and then start the action, which will skip the display of instructions.

When the prerequisites are met, the action enters the configuration stage. In the configuration stage you areable to adjust properties and make changes, but none of these are final. The action will show you interactively howthe model will change, but the original, unaltered model will shine through. This way it is easy to see the impactof a change before and after.

Every action has the following four buttons at the bottom of the action panel:


The [Help] button, also operated with <F1>, brings up the help reader at the section that documents the currentaction. If the configuration stage of the action has been changed, you can either [Reset] the changes (key <Esc>)or [Apply] them (key <Enter>). When reset, the action reverses to its initial state and the model remains untouched.When applied, the model is actually modified. Either way, the action panel stays open, ready for a new changeof the same kind. The action panel can be closed with the corresponding button (also key <Esc>) or by startinganother action.

Apart from this manual and the context-sensitive help mentioned above, most buttons and options show atool-tip with a short explanation when the mouse pointer is held still over it for a second or two. These tips maybe all you need to refresh your memory, and the manual can stay on the shelf most of the time.

6.3.5.1.1 Undo and redo

An added advantage of this staged way of working on a model is that its evolution is subdivided into well-definedunits of change, perfectly suited to be recorded and played back and forth at will. That is how undo and redo workin Fairway. Single steps can be undone and redone in the conventional way of pressing <Ctrl+Z> and <Ctrl+Y>but the complete string of changes can also be inspected by selecting [Edit][Navigate action history]. This brings upa list of performed actions, which can also be embedded inside the main window just like the tree view, and byclicking on the items in that list you can undo and redo multiple items at once.

Attention

Undo is an exclusive feature of the GUI, and in few places this functionality still needs to be implemented.The action history will be cleared whenever you leave the GUI or use any of

• Split polycurve (discussed on page 58)

• Join polycurves (discussed on page 58)

• The [Swap] (discussed on page 46) mode of Change the shape of a curve

• The option [Legacy Interface] of Properties of polycurves (discussed on page 56)

6.3.5.2 Change the shape of a curve

This action is at the core of Fairway modelling, and packed with functionality. It is started from [Curves][Changethe shape of the curve] (keys <Alt><C><S>), or by selecting a curve and clicking on one of its points or vertices.

There are three main ways to change the shape of a curve. Firstly, it is possible to change the points of thecurve, and let Fairway fair the curve through the points. Secondly, it is possible to change the curve directly, bychanging the vertices of the control polygon or setting the curve type or specifying boundary conditions. The thirdway is to define a master/slave relation between curves, in which the curve shape is derived from the shape of amaster curve.

Figure 6.7: Point manipulation.

The action panel provides three tabs to work in either of these three ways: the [Points] (key ), [Curve](key <C>) and [Master] tab (key <M>). The fourth tab provides [Settings] (discussed on page 50) with which thebehaviour of the action can be adjusted.

Below the tabbed section there are four general purpose buttons: [Fair], [Process All], [Clear] and [Redistribute].These are discussed below.

6.3.5.2.1 Process All

When [Process All] is pressed (keys <Shift+P>), all the points of the curve are shifted onto their closest position onthe curve, within their freedom of motion. This is an important part of the effort to maintain a consistent network,as defined in the introduction (discussed on page 29). By default, this task is automated with the option [PointsFollow Curve] (discussed on page 51).

6.3.5.2.2 Fair

When [Fair] is pressed (key <F>), a new curve shape is computed. Unless the curve type in the [Curve] tab isdifferent from [Spline] and/or a master curve is defined in the [Master] tab, the new shape passes closely throughthe points. Exactly how close can be seen in the [Deviation] column of the coordinate table on the [Points] tab. Theaccuracy of the fit depends on the [Mean fairing deviation] given underneath (the smaller that value the closer thecurve) and whether points have been given a non-neutral weight factor in the [W] column. Larger deviations, ascompared to the mean fairing deviation, are given a redish background in the table to allow for a quick opticalquality check.

After fairing, the deviations can be eliminated by processing the points, if this isn’t done automatically already.Alternatively, the curve can be fitted exactly through the points (omitting the ones that are marked inactive

in the [W] column) by checking the [Interpolate] option. This will also change the text on the [Fair] button. Careshould be taken in using this option, because an interpolating curve may easily oscillate between points if oneof them is slightly misplaced, and inflections can spread like ripples. The ability to allow for acceptably smalldeviations between points and curves is actually one of the strengths of Fairway, and helps in producing fair linesfor production.

By default, fairing (or interpolation) is done instantly and automatically with the option [Curve Follows Points](discussed on page 51) whenever that is appropriate. Nevertheless, that option does not make this button obsolete,as you will see below.

Fairing, in the naval architectural sense of smoothing up and working out unwanted inflections, can oftenbe accomplished by alternatingly pressing [Fair] and [Process All]. Because [Fair] allows for small deviations and

[Process All] eliminates them, both curve and points subtly converge to a higher fairness with each iteration. Ob-viously, if [Points Follow Curve] (discussed on page 51) is on, points are processed immediately, and just pressing<F> a few times will quickly improve the fairness. This can easily be visualised by the curvature plot (discussedon page 51). The rate of convergence may be increased by increasing the [Mean fairing deviation], but when doneit is wise to reset that to the default value by means of the red arrow button behind the input field, as defined in[Program setup] (besproken on page 70).

Because crossing curves are connected through their shared intersection points, fairing one curve may reducethe fairness of other curves. It is easy to switch to a crossing curve and repeat the process there: crossing curvesare listed by the coloured buttons in the [Intersections] column of the coordinate table, and pressing one of thesewill implicitly apply the changes to the current curve and start manipulation of the crossing curve. By repeat-edly visiting and fairing the curves in a problematic area, imperfections can be eliminated, producing a fair andconsistent network of curves.

Another way to switch to another curve is by selecting a curve from the Tree view (discussed on page 36),which will also implicitly apply changes to the current curve.

6.3.5.2.3 Clear

Pressing [Clear] (keys <Shift+Delete>) removes any and all internal points from the current curve. Of course theintersection points with other curves remain.

6.3.5.2.4 Redistribute

When [Redistribute] is pressed (keys <Shift+R>), two things happen. First the internal points are removed, like[Clear], and then new internal points are inserted, based on the vertex locations of the spline control polygon. Thisis mainly useful after vertex manipulation, to help fixate the curve shape during future curve fairings. You maywant to [Fair] the curve after redistributing points to verify that the shape is fixated properly.

6.3.5.2.5 Points

The coordinate table forms a central part of the [Points] tab. It lists all points of the entire polycurve. The subdi-vision into individual curves is seen in the first column [T] (for “Type”) which differentiates knuckle points fromordinary points. The background of points on the current curve in that column are filled with the colour associatedwith the curve type. Rows for other curves are marked with a dotted background to indicate that these are notdirectly manipulated. If there are more points than fit in the table, a scroll bar appears on the right with horizontalmarks to indicate the location of knuckles. The current curve is marked with a vertical line on the scroll bar. Thecells in the coordinate table can be edited much like a spreadsheet. If cells are edited outside the current curve,changes to the current curve are applied and a new session is started on the other curve.

Directly underneath the coordinate table are the mode buttons, from which there is always one depressed:[Drag], [Knuckle], [Insert], [Delete], [Weighting], [Swap], [Process] and [Reposition]. The mode determines how themouse works in the modelling view.

6.3.5.2.5.1 Drag

The [Drag] mode (key <D>) on the [Points] tab simply allows for interactive manipulation of the positions of pointsby means of a dragger, introduced in section 6.3.4 on page 41, The dragger: interactive graphical positioning. If[Curve Follows Points] (discussed on page 51) is on, dragging points is an effective tool for manipulating the shapeof the curve.

If the position of a particular point needs to be keyed in exactly, make sure the dragger is snapped onto thatpoint and press <F2>. This will teleport the mouse pointer over to the corresponding row in the coordinate tableand open the first editable cell for editing. You may switch between cells with <Tab> and <Shift+Tab>. See alsoparagraph 6.3.2.4.1 on page 38, Numerical input.

6.3.5.2.5.2 Knuckle

The [Knuckle] mode (key <K>) lets you toggle the type of a point between knuckle and ordinary. This effectivelysplits or joins curves in the polycurve. Because the [Change the shape of a curve] action can only work on onecurve at a time, any changes to the current curve are applied right before a knuckle is toggled on or off. The pointnearest to the mouse pointer will light up and a message in the status bar shows what will happen to it if the leftmouse button is clicked.

It is also possible to toggle knuckles in the left-most column of the coordinate table by means of a doubleclick, <F2> or <Space>.

6.3.5.2.5.3 Insert

The [Insert] mode (key ) on the [Points] tab simply allows you to insert extra internal points on the curve. Theposition at which the point will be inserted is shown dynamically in the prelight colour, and you can preview itsexact coordinates on a temporary row in the coordinate table. Click to insert a point.

6.3.5.2.5.4 Delete

The [Delete] mode (key <Delete>) on the [Points] tab is for deleting internal points on the curve. If a certain pointcannot be deleted, the reason why is displayed on the status bar.

6.3.5.2.5.5 Weighting

In the [Weighting] mode (key <W>), the relative importance of points can be changed between neutral, inactiveand heavy. Instructions on how to do that appear in the status bar. An inactive point is marked with an outlinedarrow pointing upwards, a point with a heavy weight is marked with a filled arrow pointing downwards.

As with knuckles, it is also possible to change weights in the [W] column of the coordinate table by means ofa double click, <F2> or <Space>.

6.3.5.2.5.6 Swap

In the figure below a situation is sketched in which it may be necessary to swap two points on the curve.

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

waterline

buttock

frame

Figure 6.8: Use-case for swapping two points. Left: Initial situation. Middle: Frame shifted. Right: Swappedpoints.

On the left a frame is shown, with points numbered in sequence. Points 3 and 4 mark the intersection with awaterline and buttock respectively. Then a manipulation is performed (middle figure) that makes the frame passthe intersection between waterline and buttock on the other side. Points 3 and 4 remain on their respective curves,so now the points are ordered out of sequence as far as the frame is concerned, producing a kink in the curve. Byswapping points 3 and 4 the order can be restored and the kink removed (right figure).

The [Swap] mode is designed to do this. However, only points that form the side of a trianglar face can beswapped, as shown in the figure. Any pair of points nearest to the mouse pointer that satisfy this requirement willlight up, and be swapped upon a click of the mouse.

Sequencing problems around faces with a higher number of sides cannot easily be repaired. Often the fastestsolution is to delete the problematic polycurve entirely and reinsert it. Another solution is to split it up, removethe kink and reconstruct the missing part by connecting points. See section 6.3.5.10 on page 58, Split polycurve,section 6.3.5.5 on page 55, Remove Polycurve and section 6.3.5.11 on page 59, Connect Points.

6.3.5.2.5.7 Process

In the [Process] mode, individual points can be shifted onto the curve, within their freedom of motion.


6.3.5.2.5.8 Reposition

In the [Reposition] mode, individual points may be whifted along the curve, if their freedom of motion allows this.If not, an explanation will appear in the status bar. Care should be taken not to shift points past neighbouringpoints, which would bring them out of sequence, causing a kink in the curve when it is faired.

6.3.5.2.6 Curve

The [Curve] tab is divided into two sections. In the upper section, the curve type can be specified, which alsoenables controls that are relevant to the type. In the lower section, boundary conditions can be set and manipulatedto the start and end points of the spline.

Figure 6.9: Curve manipulation.

6.3.5.2.6.1 Spline

As explained in section 6.1.2.1 on page 29, Lines, a spline is a freely malleable curve, both by vertex manipulationand by the fairing algorithm. All other curve types produce a fixed shape. The default colour associated withsplines is light blue. Splines may have specified boundary conditions at both ends. There are four modes forvertex manipulation.

6.3.5.2.6.2 Drag

In the [Drag] mode on the [Curve] tab vertices can be moved by means of a dragger. It is often easier to design goodcurves with a low number of vertices, therefore you may want to [Delete] vertices first.

6.3.5.2.6.3 More

In the [More] mode on the [Curve] tab, more vertices may be added locally to give more shape control. Existingvertices will be shifted to preserve the current shape of the curve. Highlighted vertices will be shown to indicatewhere vertices will be positioned if the mouse button is pressed.

6.3.5.2.6.4 Insert

In the [Insert] mode on the [Curve] tab, additional vertices may be inserted into the control polygon. This willchange the shape of the curve. It is possible to quickly “sketch” a shape with a string of vertices by giving asequence of clicks in the graphical view.

6.3.5.2.6.5 Delete

The [Delete] mode on the [Curve] tab simply allows vertices to be deleted from the control polygon.



6.3.5.2.6.6 Straight Line

Straight lines remain straight and are unaffected by fairing operations. Curves in flat sections of the shell canadvantageously be defined as straight lines. When a curve is turned into a straight line, any existing boundaryconditions are removed. The colour associated with straight lines is green by default.

6.3.5.2.6.7 Circular Arc with given radius

The default colour for circular arcs is light grey. Arcs with a given radius can only exist in polycurves that aredefined in a plane, not in spatial polycurves. The arc can be flipped to the other side by inverting the sign of theradius.

6.3.5.2.6.8 Circular Arc with given tangent

Arcs with a given tangent have always one tangent defined. The tangent can be changed in the lower section of the[Curve] tab. You are free to define a tangent at the other end, which will remove the existing boundary condition.

6.3.5.2.6.9 Circular Arc through three points

This type enables two modes. The [Drag Position] mode displays a dragger with which an arbitrary position can beset that the arc will pass through. Using the [Pick Point] mode the arc can be made to pass through an existing pointon the curve.

6.3.5.2.6.10 Conic arc with two tangents

Straight lines and circles are conic sections as well, but this type allows the remaining conic sections to be defined:parabolic, hyperbolic and elliptical arcs. These are defined by a two-edged control polygon, the middle vertex ofwhich is given by the intersection of the two tangents. Consequently, the tangents should be coplanar; if they arenot, the curve will find a plane in the middle, but not adhere to the given tangents strictly.

The type of conic section depends on the [Shape Factor]: a higher shape factor will pull the curve tighter tothe middle vertex, a factor of 0 will give a straight line. A parabolic is produced with a factor 1, higher factorsproduce a hyperbolic and lower factors an elliptical arc.

The shape factor can also be determined automatically by specifying a third point that the arc should passthrough, analogous to [Circular Arc through three points].

6.3.5.2.6.11 Boundary Conditions

In the lower section of the [Curve] tab there is a table listing the boundary conditions at the start and end of thecurrent curve (for an explanation of curve direction see section 6.1.2.1 on page 29, Lines). In the left column anicon indicates the current condition at each end, as follows:

No boundary conditionsManually specified tangentTangent derived from adjacent curveManually specified tangent, straight endTangent derived from adjacent curve, straight endTangent and curvature derived from adjacent curve

The condition can be changed with a double click on the icon, which brings up a pull-down menu with availableconditions. Not all conditions may be available, for instance if there is no adjacent curve at that end. If so, thereason will be given in a tool-tip when the mouse pointer is kept still for a few seconds.

Next to the icons are the coordinates of the current tangent vector. These can be edited in the table or manipu-lated interactively in the [Drag Tangent] mode, activated with the corresponding button in the table.

6.3.5.2.7 Master

On the [Master] tab a master/slave relation can be defined, in which the shape of the current curve, the slave, can bemade dependent on another curve in the model, the master curve. Whenever the master curve changes, the slavecurve will change also, according to the defined dependency. This is exemplified at the end of this section with theconstruction of deck camber and sheer strake. A cascade of depedencies can exist, as master curves themselvescan be a slave of other master curves, and several curves can depend on the same master curve.



Figure 6.10: Configuration of shape dependency

The first step in establishing a master/slave relation is to select the master curve, using the [Select] button. Youare free to select a master from any active solid; solids can be toggled active/inactive in the [Access] column of the[tree view] before starting the selection.

An existing relation can be annulled with the [Free] button.

Next steps are to select the proper relation and the definition of the dependency.

6.3.5.2.7.1 Relation

The relation defines how points on the current curve are mapped to points on the master curve and vice versa.Choose between these four relations:

Proportional between End PointsThe start and end points of the current curve will be related to the start and end points of the master curve.Inbetween these, points will be related proportionally to the lengths of the curves. It may be necessary toreverse the direction of one of the polycurves using [Properties of polycurves] (discussed on page 56).

Longitudinal/Transverse/Vertical PositionPoints on the current curve will relate to points on the master curve that are on the same longitudinal, trans-verse or vertical position respectively. You will need to decide which direction is appropriate for thesituation; mostly this will be the direction in which lines can be drawn that cross the master and slave curvesat angles closest to 90°.

6.3.5.2.7.2 Definition

The last step in the configuration of a master/slave relation is how points on the current curve are defined, basedon points on the master curve.

Arithmetic CombinationThe length, breadth and height coordinates on the current curve can be defined individually as a linear com-bination of a constant value, the coordinates on the master curve and the coordinates on the unaltered slavecurve.



Figure 6.11: Linear combination of coordinates.

OffsetThe current curve will be shaped identically to the master curve, offset over a certain distance and direction.The direction is perpendicular to the offset plane, whose normal vector can be keyed in or rotated interac-tively when the [Drag Plane] button is pressed. This will show the plane and a rotational dragger, consistingof three circular strips that can be picked and dragged with the mouse pointer.

The offset distance can be specified for the start and end point individually, which will produce a lineartransition over the length of the curve. These can also be dragged interactively using the [Drag Offset] mode,which will show a linear dragger snapped to the curve end nearest to the mouse pointer.

6.3.5.2.7.3 Example: Deck camber

Let’s say you want to construct a deck with constant camber of 2/100 of the local breadth of the deck. To do thatwe start manipulating the deck profile line at the plane of symmetry. Then we select the deck line in the side asthe master curve, whose transverse coordinates mark half the local breadth. We will set the relation to [LongitudinalPosition], because both curves generally run longitudinaly. We want breadth to be unaffected (free) as well aslength, but the height should equal the height of the deck in the side plus 4/100 of its breadth. So we define anarithmetic combination of H = 0.04 ·Bmaster +Hmaster.

6.3.5.2.7.4 Example: Sheer strake

If you need to construct a sheer strake then this is one way to do it: Start manipulating the curve that marks thelower seam of the sheer strake and select the upper seam as master curve. The relation can be set to ‘Proportionalbetween End Points’ or ‘Longitudinal Position’; which is the better option depends on the hull shape and youmay try both to select the appropriate one. Note that a proportional relation will not result in a strake of constantheight if the upper and lower seams are of different length and the vessel has sheer, but is may nevertheless resultin better aestetics.

Now set the definition to ‘Offset’, and define a horizontal offset plane, with normal (0.0, 0.0, 1.0). Finally theheight of the sheer strake can be specified at the front and end of the seam.

6.3.5.2.8 Settings

The fourth tab on the action panel, [Settings], contains some options with which the behaviour of the action can beadjusted.



Figure 6.12: Action settings and frame area

6.3.5.2.8.1 Show Target Frame Area

If a target sectional area curve (target SAC) has been constructed, see section 6.3.5.14 on page 61, Changethe shape of the SAC, you may want to compare the current frame area (below the construction waterline) withthe corresponding point on the target SAC. The option Target Frame Area [Show Target Frame Area] toggles anadditional [Frame Area] section at the top of the action panel, as shown above; provided the current curve is part ofa frame. It can be removed at any time with the cross button in the top right.

Shown is the target area according to the SAC, and a bar graph indicating the surplus or deficit area of thecurrent frame, as compared to the target. The [Fit] button will transform the current frame so that its area matchesthe target SAC, while its shape will be preserved as much as possible. Further details are found in section 6.10 onpage 81, Hullform transformation.

Together with the [Frame Area] section in the action panel, appears in the moddeling views a transparentrectangular plane. The area of this plane equals the target frame area, while the height is equal to the design depth.This may help optically in designing the frame shape, as the area under the frame within the rectangle needs tomatch the area from the frame up to the construction waterline outside the rectangle.

6.3.5.2.8.2 Show Curvature Plot

Curvature plots will be shown on prelit and selected polycurves if switched on, as documented in para-graph 6.3.2.3.2 on page 37, Prelit polycurves. In case you don’t want the plots to appear that often but do want tosee the curvature during shape manipulation, then the [Show Curvature Plot] on the [Settings] tab is for you.

6.3.5.2.8.3 Curve Follows Points

If the option [Curve Follows Points] is checked, then the curve is instantly and automatically faired upon any changein the information on which the fairing is based. Most notably, when this is on, the curve can be interactivelyshaped by dragging points and tangents. In many cases this can be an effective alternative to shaping the splinethrough its vertices, and has the added bonus that the shape remains fixed during future curve fairings. For vertexmanipulation, on the contrary, generally requires the shape to be explicitly fixated (discussed on page 45), whichstill is no quarantee against subtle changes during future curve fairings.

6.3.5.2.8.4 Points Follow Curve

If the option [Points Follow Curve] is checked, then all points will be processed automatically (shifted onto thecurve) whenever the shape of the curve changes. Together with [Fair Crossing Curves Too] this is a great help in


keeping the network consistent at all times.If you switch this off, you will most probaly want to [Process] (discussed on page 46) individual points or

[Process All] (discussed on page 44) before you apply the shape changes.

6.3.5.2.8.5 Fair Crossing Curves Too

Check this if you like all curves that pass through the points of the current curve to adapt dynamically to anychanges in their position. This is a great help in keeping the network consistent.

6.3.5.3 New Planar Polycurve by Intersection

This action enables the user to quickly add planar polycurves to active solids by intersecting them with a plane,or a set of parallel planes. It is started from [Polycurves][New Planar Polycurve by Intersection] or with the keys<Alt><N>. These can then be used to manipulate the hull shape in higher detail and be exported to con-struction software. Polycurves also add visual detail, but if that is your only objective then you way want to seethem just temporarily, which may be easiest with [Show Indicative Intersections] (discussed on page 60). Anotherway of adding polycurves is offered by the action [Connect Points] (discussed on page 59).

Figure 6.13: Adding a new polycurve in a plane through three points.

Planar polycurves can be added in two ways: either in manually configured positions and orientations or instored configurations, the so-called position-sets. Each of these have their own tab in the action panel.

6.3.5.3.1 Single configuration

The [Single Configuration] is pretty straightforward, consisting of a choice of [Orientation] and accompanying [Po-sition]. For most orientations the position is determined by just one single value, except for planar polycurves ina plane through three points. The points are colour-coded in graphics and their corresponding input fields. Thepoints can be moved by means of the dragger and by keying in values, and the plane through them is clipped to themaximum dimensions of the model. The planes in other orientations also have a dragger that they can be movedwith.

There are two more groups on this tab and both of them are optional: [Repetition] and [Name]. With [Repetition]one can add several polycurves in parallel planes at once, by increasing the [Number] and specifying the [RepetitionInterval]. The direction of repetition can be reverted by inverting the sign of the interval.


The [Name] field shows how the polycurve will be called when it is generated. You have the opportunity tochange the name here, unless the repetition number is higher than one.

6.3.5.3.2 Position-sets

The [Position-Sets] tab shows a list of existing position-sets with the option to check and uncheck them. Preview-planes will be shown for checked sets. The button [Edit Position-Sets...] allows you to add and remove sets fromthe list and change the positions in them.

Attention

A position-set is nothing more than a set of declared positions and orientations, irrespective of whether match-ing polylines exist or not. Un-checking a certain set will not remove polycurves that exist at the positions inthat set.

6.3.5.3.2.1 Edit positions-sets

The first menu which appears contains the following values:

SelectedThis value can be toggled to either ‘yes’ or ‘no’, and corresponds to the check mark in the list of sets in theGUI.

NameThis value contains the name of the group. Specifying a clear name may prevent against unwanted addingor removing of lines. A useful name may be something like a short description of the group of lines.

Line typeDefines the type of the entire group of lines, the following types can be chosen: frames, buttocks and wa-terlines.

minL, minB, minH, maxL, maxB, maxHDefine the domain in which the lines of the concerned group are being added. By means of this function,frames, waterlines and buttocks that do not cover the entire hull shape, can be added. The lines are beingcut off on the nearest intersecting line outside the defined domain.

The place of the group of lines can be specified by entering the group of lines. This can be done by pressingenter or by clicking on the group. Here the following values may be specified:

MultipleThis value can be toggled to either ‘yes’ or ‘no’. This specifies whether this definition is appropriate forone line or more than one.

Beginning cq. locationThis is the first location of the group of lines, or, alternatively, the only location in case Multiple is toggledto ‘no’. The value is the length, breadth or heigth of the first line. Recall that length, breadth or heigthdepends on the chosen line type (frame, buttock or waterline).

EndThe last location of the group of lines.

IncrementDefines the distance between each line. This value can be filled in directly, or, alternatively, indirectly bythe value number of intervals.

The value is the number of lines which fit between the ‘beginning’ and the ‘end’ with the given increment.Therefore if this value is modified, the increment value is modified automatically, since the beginning andthe end are constant during this operation.

Note

Each group of lines can contain multiple definitions of places. These definitions can be added or removed bypressing [New], [Insert] or [Remove] from the bar in top of the screen.


6.3.5.3.2.2 PIAS-import

If frame spaces have been defined in section 5.1.11 on page 26, Definition of frame spaces and a set of framepositions is being edited, then the option [PIAS-import] appears in the menu bar. This option imports the definedframes into the current set.

6.3.5.3.3 Settings

In the [Settings] tab of [New Planar Polycurve by Intersection] the user can configure the accuracy in which newcurves will match the existing curved surface. This is a model-wide setting, and is saved with the model.

Not with curved surfaceThe curved surface is completely ignored, new polycurves are faired through intersecting polycurves only.This can be appropriate in dense networks, where new polycurves do not need internal points.

Surface based on smooth tangent ribbonsInternal points will be generated on a high quality surface. Appropriate in sparse networks.

Surface based on linear tangent ribbonsInternal points will be generated, based on surfaces with reduced smoothness requirements. Appropriate inmoderately dense networks, where smooth tangent ribbons could oscillate and cause unwanted inflections.

Approximate distance between points on curved surfaceThis is the target distance between internal points. A smaller distance will make the curves match the sur-face at a higher accuracy. However, the aim is often not to require more points than necessary but stillenough to produce a desirable shape.

Minimum number of points per faceBy setting this to >1, internal points will be generated even if a polycurves’ entry and exit points of a faceare closer together than the above value.

6.3.5.4 Move polycurve

Polycurves, or even complete solids, can be translated with the action started from [Polycurves][Move Polycurve] orwith the keys <Alt><M>.

Figure 6.14: Moving polycurves

The translation is either keyed in relatively in the first three fields on the panel, or, if just a single planarpolycurve is selected, to an absolute position in the fourth field.

Polycurves can be selected in the usual ways, either before or after starting the action. If you need to deselecta single polycurve by holding the <Ctrl> key, be sure to click the original polycurve, not its shifted image.

If the option [Fair crossing curves] is checked, crossing curves will be adapted to the translation. However, if asystem of mutually intersecting polycurves is being moved then you may want to leave this option off.

A complete solid is easily translated as a whole by doing this:

1. Switch off [Fair crossing curves].

2. Collapse any other solids in the Tree view (discussed on page 36).

3. Expand the solid by selecting its name in the tree view and press <*>.

4. Select all its polycurves by pressing <Ctrl+A>.

The names of polycurves remain unchanged, you may want to update them to reflect their new position using[Systemize polycurve names] (discussed on page 58).

6.3.5.5 Remove Polycurve

This action allows the user to remove one or more polycurves from solids. It is started from [Polycurves][RemovePolycurve] or the keys <Alt><N>. Polycurves may be selected before or after starting the action, which arethen rendered transparently to show that they will be removed when the action is applied. As usual, polycurvescan be added or removed from the selection by holding the <Ctrl> key. A sequence of polycurves is easiestselected from the tree view (discussed on page 36), by holding the <Shift> key or by dragging across items. Ifthe polycurve cannot be removed completely, because another polycurve starts or ends on it, then the remainingpart will be rendered in white. The action panel shows how many polycurves will be removed completely andhow many partially. A remaining part can be removed completely by adding the polycurves that end on it to theselection.

Figure 6.15: Removing polycurves

6.3.5.5.1 Remove points

If the option [Remove Points] is checked, then the points on selected polycurves will be removed from intersectingpolycurves as well; knuckles excluded. If unchecked, then no points will be removed, which prevents crossingcurves from changing shape.

6.3.5.5.2 Position-sets

Analogous to paragraph 6.3.5.3.2 on page 53, Position-sets, the [Position-Sets] tab in the [Remove Polycurve] actionpanel allows all polycurves in active solids at positions in checked sets to be selected at once. Position-sets canbe edited by pressing the [Edit Position-Sets...] button, as described in paragraph 6.3.5.3.2.1 on page 53, Editpositions-sets.

You may switch back to the [Individual Selection] tab see the selection information, and optionally add or removepolycurves to and from the selection.

Attention

Assume frames exist at 0.0m, 30.0m and 60.0m. Next, frames are added at a position-set with frames between0.0m and 60.0m at an interval of 0.50m. Now if this set is used to remove polycurves, then the original framesat 0.0m, 30.0m and 60.0m will be removed as well. This can be prevented by deselecting specific polycurvesbefore applying the action, or by locking the polycurves in the Tree view (discussed on page 36) beforechecking the position set.

6.3.5.6 Properties of polycurves

Properties of one or more polycurves can be changed with the [Polycurves][Properties of Polycurves] action, whichcan be started with the keys <Alt><O>.

Figure 6.16: Changing polycurve properties.

These are the properties that can be changed:

NameIf a single polycurve is selected, its name can be edited here. This field is unavailable when several poly-curves are selected.

ChineThe chine property of polycurves can be turned on or off. Chines are often drawn with a thicker line width,and are generally used to connect knuckles in crossing polycurves. Any new polycurves that are added tothe solid will get a knuckle where they cross a chine.

TypePolycurves can be changed from planar polycurves into spatial polycurves and vice versa. In the latter case,a plane is found that best fits the spatial polycurve, in which the polycurve and its points are projected. If,for example, all points of a spatial polycurve lie in a horizontal plane, then the polycurve will turn into awaterline.

CWLThis option is only available if a single waterline, planar polycurve or spatial polycurve is selected. It willmark the polycurve that will be used in rendered output, see section 6.7 on page 72, Show (rendered andcolored) surfaces, to distinguish the parts above and below the waterline. It can be used to render the watersurface as well.

Deck at SideThis option is only applicable for longitudinals, and indicates that the polycurve is to be considered as (high-est watertight) deck at side. When converting to a PIAS calculation model the frames will extend to thispolycurve, not further. It is possible to assign this attribute to multiple polycurves, so that a deck-edgejump can be modelled; but only a complete polycurve can be deck at side, not a partial one. However, itis allowed that a frame is crossed by multiple ‘deck at side’ polycurves, in that case the highest is ruling.

Finally, it is advised that if the deck at side mechanism is applied, each polycurve where a frame should endis assigned this attribute, even if it is the highest polycurve in the hull model already.

Reverse Polycurve DirectionThis button will reverse the direction of selected polycurves, as defined in section 6.1.2.1 on page 29, Lines.You may want to do this to align the direction of a slave curve with its master.

To change the position of a polycurve, users are referred to section 6.3.5.4 on page 54, Move polycurve.Some less often used functionality has not been ported to the new GUI yet, but can be accessed by pressing

the [Legacy Interface] button, available if a single polycurve is selected. These include

• Plate boundary

• Phantom face

• Double

These are not documented here, see section 6.13 on page 85, Alphanumerical manipulation. The Copy/Pastefunctionality is currently only available from [Alphanumerical manipulation].

6.3.5.7 Curve Properties

Most properties of curves relate to their shape, which is the domain of [Change the shape of a curve] (discussed onpage 43). Other properties can be adjusted with the action that is found in the menu at [Curves][Curve Properties],and keystrokes <Alt><C>. Currently, this only concerns chines, which cause crossing polycurves that areadded to the model successively to get a knuckle at that point. Chines can be defined with [Properties of polycurves](discussed on the facing page) and are displayed with a greater line thickness by default. With the options here itis possible to specify boundary conditions between the curves on either side of the knuckles, when polycurves areadded.

Figure 6.17: Setting curve properties.

Several chines can be selected, and their current properties are indicated by the radio buttons in the Old column.They can collectively be given a new property value in the New column. Here the notions “left” and “right” areused as defined in section 6.1.2.1 on page 29, Lines, and the term “left master, right slave” denotes that the curveto the right of the chine has a boundary condition dependency on the curve to the left of the chine. Curvaturecontinuity implies tangential continuity, see also paragraph 6.3.5.2.6.11 on page 48, Boundary Conditions.

6.3.5.8 Systemize polycurve names

This action renames all polycurves in selected solids according to a specified convention.

Figure 6.18: Systematizing polycurve names.

6.3.5.9 Join polycurves

This action, started from the menu by [Polycurves][Join Polycurves] or the keys <Alt><J>, is very minimal-istic; its panel lacks an [Apply] button and contains instructions only. The fastest way to join two polycurves thatshare an end point is to select both of them and start the action. The polycurves are joined instantly into a singlepolycurve, with a knuckle at the joint. Alternatively, you can start the action first and it will inform you what todo.

Figure 6.19: Joining polycurves.

Currently, joining of polycurves cannot be undone (but they can be split manually).

6.3.5.10 Split polycurve

Polycurves can be split at a knuckle, by starting the action from the menu [Polycurves][Split Polycurve] or withthe keys <Alt><S>. When a polycurve is selected, the user is asked to select the knuckle to split at. Thepolycurve is plit instantly.

Figure 6.20: Splitting a polycurve.

Currently, splitting a polycurve cannot be undone (but polycurves can be joined manually).

6.3.5.11 Connect Points

One way to add polycurves to a network is the use of [New Planar Polycurve by Intersection] (discussed on page 52).Alternatively, you can weave a new polycurve through existing points with the action initiated from the menu at[Polycurves][Connect Points] or with the keys <Alt><C>. This action can also be used to extend an existingpolycurve.

Figure 6.21: Create or extend a polycurve by connecting points.

If you wish to create a new polycurve, then fill out a suitable name and press the [Create] button. Next youwill be able to pick the start point of the new polycurve, followed by successive points that the curve is to passthrough. Finish by pressing [Apply] or <Enter>.

6.3.5.12 Generate Fillet Points

A chine can be reconstructed into a fillet by rounding the knuckles in crossing curves. For this it is necessary tofind the fillet points: where a circle of a given radius touches the curves on either side of a knuckle. This action,initiated from [Polycurves][Generate Fillet Points] or the keys <Alt><F>, will find these points. Afterwards,the fillet points can be turned into knuckles and the intermediate section turned into a circular arc, using [Changethe shape of a curve] (discussed on page 43).


Figure 6.22: Generation of fillet points on either side of a knuckle (upper curve) and after fitting a circular arc(lower curve).

Points are inserted at the instant of a mouse click, so one can just trace the chine, there is no need to selectany curves. After the fillet points have been turned into knuckles, these themselves should be connected withnew chines, using [Connect Points] (discussed on the previous page) and [Properties of polycurves] (discussed onpage 56).

6.3.5.13 Show Indicative Intersections

This action does not change the model, but can temporarily generate intersection curves at selected position setswithout adding them to the network.


Figure 6.23: Indicative intersections.

This can be used to visually verify the definitions of position sets, but also to visualise the surface shape. Theintersection curves disappear as soon as the action panel is closed. Position sets can be edited as described inparagraph 6.3.5.3.2.1 on page 53, Edit positions-sets.

6.3.5.14 Change the shape of the SAC

If main dimensions have been determined, including target values for block coefficient (Cb) and longitudinalcenter of buoyancy (LCB), Fairway enables you to design towards these targets by means of the target sectionalarea curve (target SAC). If a target SAC is available, it can be used for automated hullform transformation (seesection 6.10 on page 81, Hullform transformation) and to compare the submerged frame area during frame ma-nipulation (see paragraph 6.3.5.2.8.1 on page 51, Show Target Frame Area). A target SAC can be generated fromLap’s diagrams using [Generate the target SAC from the Lap-diagrams] (discussed on page 81) or derived from thecurrent frame area’s using [Generate the target SAC from the present hullform] (discussed on page 82). The sectionalarea curves can be viewed in a dedicated modelling view, which also shows the lines of the under water body forreference: [Window][Sectional Area Curve (SAC)]. The target SAC can then be manipulated with the action startedfrom [Curves][Change the Shape of the SAC], keys <Alt><C><A> or a click on one of the points on the targetSAC.

Figure 6.24: Manipulating the target sectional area curve.

The target SAC is represented by a polycurve fitted through a number of given area values, and can thus bemanipulated by changing these values; much in the same way as points can be changed on ordinary polycurves.There are four manipulation modes: [Drag], [Knuckle], [Insert] and [Delete]; their operation is completely analogousto the point manipulation modes (discussed on page 45).


6.3.5.14.1 Fit

During manipulation of the target SAC, two gauge bars in the action panel show how well the SAC matches thetarget values as specified in [Main dimensions (design) & hull coefficients] (discussed on page 66). The [Fit] buttonhere will transform the target SAC so it matches the target values, using the same algorithm as in [Transformationof the target SAC] (discussed on page 84).

6.3.6 Supporting functionality

6.3.6.1 Clipping

To prevent parts of the model from occluding an area of interest, the menu option [Display][Clipping][Clip to Box] canbe used to hide the parts of the model that fall outside a resizable box.

Figure 6.25: Clip to box.

The coloured facelets can be picked and dragged to resize the box (along the edges and in the corners) orto translate the box (in the middle of each face). The box can be resized to contain the whole model with themenu option [Display][Clipping][Clip Box Contain All]. The option [Display][Clipping][Hide Box] will hide the box andits facelets, but the clipping will remain active.

When a curve is being manipulated that partly falls outside the clipping box, it will not be clipped but drawnin its entirity.

6.3.6.2 Hydrostatics

The menu option [Window][Hydrostatics] will bring up a window with hydrostatic information of the vessel. Thewindow can either be floating separated from the main window, or be embedded in it somewhere around themodelling area. The information herein is in part derived from the sectional area curve (SAC), which again isderived from the submerged shape of frames. Whenever the shape of a frame changes, the [Update] button in thehydrostatics window will be enabled, which allows the information to be recalculated.



Warning

Be aware of the role that frames play in the correctness of hydrostatic analyses. If a frame is not defined overthe full height of the under water body, its area will not be representative for the displacement of the body atthat location. A look at the SAC, [Window][Sectional Area Curve], will quickly reveal problems of this kind, asseen in the figure below. Errors like this can be fixed in two ways: either extend the frame over the full heightof the submerged body, or convert the polycurve to spatial type using [Properties of polycurves] (discussed onpage 56).

Figure 6.26: Hydrostatics window and a defective sectional area curve due to an incomplete frame.

6.3.7 Troubleshooting

This section contains some known problems with their solutions.



Problem Possible cause Things to try

The drop-down for bound-ary conditions, point weights andknuckles opens at double click,but closes immediately.

This is a problem that occurs fora certain Windows configurationoption.

The drop-down will probably stayopen for as long as you keep themouse button pressed as part ofthe second click. You can thenmake a selection by releasing thebutton over the desired item.The drop-down will also stayopen after the double click bychecking the “Slide open comboboxes” option in Control Panel ->System and Maintenance -> Sys-tem -> Advanced system settings-> Performance Settings -> Vi-sual Effects.

Curves of the same type showwith different intensity.

The anti-aliasing setting is on, andyou don’t like it.Anti-aliasing is a technique to re-duce distortion when representinghigh precision graphics on lowerresolution devices such as a rasterdisplay. Without anti-aliasing,curves have a jagged appearancebecause pixels are either turnedfully on or fully off. Anti-aliasingresults in graded pixel values,making curves look smoother andmore precise, albeit a bit woollier.When the position of a vertical(or horizontal) line coinsides ex-actly with the pixel raster, it is dis-played with a width of 1 pixel atfull intensity, whether anti-aliasedor not.When the line position falls in be-tween two pixel positions, it maybe displayed by either of the twopixels without anti-aliasing, at avisual inaccuracy of half a pixel.With anti-aliasing, both pixels areturned on at a reduced intensity,giving the perception of higher ac-curacy.

On some monitors the differencein intensity due to anti-aliasing ismore noticeable than on others.You can turn off anti-aliasing bychoosing [Edit][Preferences...]-[OpenGL] and turning off“Hardware-based smoothing”and “Multi-sampling”.Alternatively, you can reducethe difference in itensity by in-creasing the line width in [Edit]-[Preferences...][Curves].


Problem Possible cause Things to try

The middle mouse button doesnot work.

Your mouse driver might be con-figured to assign a task to the mid-dle button.

Exit or uninstall the mouse driver,or configure the driver.If you are using Logitech Set-Point™:

1. Open SetPoint

2. Select the “My Mouse”pane

3. Select the third button

4. In “Select Task”, mark“Other”

5. Choose “Middle Button”

If nothing helps, you can use theNavigation mode (discussed onpage 41) instead.

My 3Dconnexion Space-Navigator does not work.

There is no graphics area that hasinput focus.

Give a mouse click in a graphicsarea.

The driver has not been startedwhile the device was plugged in.

Make sure that the device isplugged in. Then start the driverfrom the Windows start menu,folder “3Dconnexion”, subfolder“3DxWare”, item “Start Driver”.

The driver may not be responding. Start the Windows Task Man-ager <Ctrl+Alt+Del> and end the3dxsrv.exe process. Then followthe points above.

The appearance of some ob-jects on screen seems wrong. Fig-ure fig. 6.27 on the next page, e.-g., shows how the ATi RADEO-N X300 SE display adapter partlyfails to render transparency.

There may be a bug in the driverfor your display adapter.

Visit the website of your adaptermanufacturer and locate the latestdriver that matches your graphicscard. Follow the instructions forinstallation.


Figure 6.27: Render defect with old display adapter driver.

Figure 6.28: Proper transparency with updated driver.

6.4 Name, dimensions and coefficients

This menu is also found in chapter 8 on page 103, Hulldef: Hullform definition, and for Fairway the first option isof interest, discussed below. All other ship hull parameters that can be specified in this menu are not relevant forFairway, but may be important at subsequent calculations with PIAS. In chapter 8 on page 103, Hulldef: Hullformdefinition these parameters will be discussed into more detail.

6.4.1 Main dimensions (design) & hull coefficients

Here relevant dimensions for the hull design can be specified, and, in addition, also a number of hull form coef-ficients that are used as target values in the design. With these coefficients (block coefficient, LCB and midshipcoefficient) a SAC can be generated, which can be utilized in two ways:

• As basis for a global hull form transformation (see section 6.10 on page 81, Hullform transformation).

• As guide when designing the frame shapes zie paragraph 6.3.5.2.8.1 on page 51, Show Target Frame Area.

Also the SAC itself can be generated in two ways, either automatically, see section 6.10 on page 81, Hullformtransformation, or by interactive graphical manipulation, see section 6.3.5.14 on page 61, Change the shape of theSAC.


6.5 File and solid management 67

6.5 File and solid management

File and solid management

1. File history

2. Save current design

3. Solid management

4. Undo

5. Quit the program without saving

6.5.1 File history

This option is meant to save a set of designs or design stages. It is also possible to use it as a backup option.Maximally fifteen designs can be saved. Apart from the standard editing functions, the option [Select] is alsoavailable. With this button you can select a design to work with. When defining a new design with [New] or[Insert], the currently selected design is copied to a new file, for which you must specify a file name. The newdesign is a copy of the selected design at that moment.

In the menu with design variants one column is marked [Automat. Save]. In this column you can specify whichdesign of the available set is used to save the hullform when the program performs an automatic save action. Ifthe automatic save option is used without a marked design variant, by default the ‘selected’ design is used for thatpurpose. The time interval for automatic save is documented in section 6.6.1.1 on page 70, Program setup

6.5.2 Save current design

The current hull shape is saved without leaving the program.

6.5.3 Solid management

When designing the shape of a ship hull it may be convenient to consider the vessel to be composed by multiplebuilding blocks. These blocks, denoted by the word solid hereafter, can either be completely unconnected, or beglued together at a particular design stage, e.g., a bulbous bow which is intersected with the hull. At the moment ofwriting not all solid operations have been implemented. Examples of anticipated but still unimplemented optionsare the creation of negative or positive combinations of two solids. Positive combinations can be used to add twosolids, such as a keel with a hull, while negative operations are intended to subtract solids, such as a cylinderwhich creates an open bow thruster channel in a hull.

The options which are currently implemented are :

• Creating a new, empty solid.

• Removing a solid.

• Copy a solid to another one.

• Merge two solids on both sides of the centre plane. In order to use this function, two requirements have tobe fulfilled :

– Both parts to merge must be distinct PS and SB hulls.

– The two parts must match exactly at centre plane. This requirement implies that the vessel must beclosed at deck. If that is not the case, the vessel can be closed automatically with a straight deck, seesection 6.6.8 on page 71, Close vessel at deck.

• Split a complete hull, which is defined at PS and SB, into separate PS and SB semi hulls.

• File IO operations:



– Export a solid. When this option is chosen the highlighted solid will be exported to a file, with auser-defined name. The file which is created can be imported into another Fairway project, but it canalso serve as a stand-alone hull shape.

– Import a solid. After specifying the desired file name, the solid is imported, at least if that Fairway filecontains only one solid.

– Generation of objects of simple shape. At this moment two shapes are available, a ’minimal ship’,(which is an object containing a deck line, a stem/stern contour and one straight ordinate) and a 1x1x1m cube. In due course scaling options and rotation options will be included, in order to give thegenerated objects the desired size, location and orientation. While these options are still lacking, onecan use the ’hullform transformation’ to resize and translate objects.

• Boolean operations. With Boolean operations positive or negative combinations of two solids can be pro-duced. Positive combinations can be used to add two solids, while negative combinations are intended forsubtraction, such as a cylinder which is subtracted from a hull, thus forming an open bow propellor chan-nel. Although the Boolean operations are fully implemented, they are not yet general available, becauseat this moment they are being tested thoroughly. When executing a Boolean operation the message Whenexecuting a Boolean operation it is necessary that, if a phanthom face is present, this face lies fully in theCL plane. With solid .... this is not the case. This can be solved by closing the vessel at deck might be given.The background is that Boolean operations are only functional on faces which are (almost) flat. A phantomface which runs from stem to deck edge is not flat, and therefore the deck will have to be closed, in order toleave a flat phantom face at CL.

Figure 6.29: Negative Boolean combination.

Solids are managed in a menu with the following information :

• In the first column the character of the solid for subsequent Boolean operations can be specified. Thischaracter is a letter A' orB’ which can be used subsequently with the Boolean combination union A∪B,intersection A∩B and difference A4B (in the program represented with A+B, A-B en A∧B).

• Name. The name of the solid.

• Side. The side where the solid resides. There are four possibilities :

– SB. The solid is a demi hull, situated at SB.

– PS. The solid is a demi hull, situated at PS.

– SB & PS. The vessel is symmetrical over centre plane, while the solid is situated at SB, and alsomodels the PS mirrored part.

– Complete. The solid represents a complete hull with a part at SB as well as at PS.

• Active. This field indicates which solid is active for manipulations in entire Fairway. Only one solid can beactive, while a ’Locked’ solid cannot be active at all.


6.6 Settings and miscellaneous 69

• Visible. Indicates whether the solid is visible during graphical manipulation.

• Type. For data management reasons some auxiliary constructions are also modelled as solids. This fieldindicates the type of solid. Possible values are:

– The ship hull, or part of the hull.

– The Sectional Area Curve.

– A projection line.

– Empty.

• Locked. If this field is set to ’yes’, the solid is protected against any modification.

• Buoyant. If this field is set to ’yes’, it is assumed the concerned solid is buoyant when hydrostatic calcula-tions on the basis of the surface model are made with PIAS.

• Curved surfaces. Under [General configuration options] (discussed on the following page), it is definedwhether or not curved surfaces are used in this model. With this option it is possible for each solid, toset if this general setting is valid, or if a specific setting prevails. For more information on the presentedoptions see paragraph 6.3.5.3.3 on page 54, Settings.

6.5.4 Undo

This option is deprecated. Undo and redo is implemented in the [Graphical User Interface (GUI)] (discussed onpage 35).

6.5.5 Quit the program without saving

With this option it is possible to leave the program without saving the design. It deals only with changes in design.Special points, definitions of linesplans, main dimensions and other parameters not related to the form will besaved. To prevent mistakes when using this option, the program asks: ’Are you sure?’.

6.6 Settings and miscellaneous

When this option is selected the next submenu appears:

4. Settings and miscellaneous

1. Define special points

2. Uniform weight factors

3. Uniform mean deviations

4. Check network and lines, with output to screen

5. Check network and lines, with output to file

6. Make all lines consistent

7. Remove all "internal" points from all lines

8. Close vessel at deck

9. Change color scheme

10. Define default window layout

The submenus behind these options will be discussed from section 6.6.2 on the next page, Define specialpoints onwards, but we start with the discussion of the general configuration options.



6.6.1 General configuration options

The general configuration appears on a property sheet that is activated using the [Config] option in the menu bar ofthe window. Note that this option can be activated from the majority of screens and menus in Fairway. From theGraphical User Interface (GUI) (discussed on page 35) this sheet is accessible from the menu [Edit][Preferences...]-[Common Settings...]. The configuration options are ordered in several tabs, which are discussed below.

6.6.1.1 Program setup

This configuration will be saved inConfiguration settings will be saved in the file Fairway.cfg. Here you may choose to save that file in thePIAS installation directory or the project directory containing the ship data.

Time interval automatic saveThis option lets you specify the approximate time interval (in minutes) between two automatic save actionsof the program. With a time interval of zero the automatic save functionality is disabled. The user cancontrol in which of the saved design variants the hull shape is saved automatically, see section 6.5.1 onpage 67, File history.

Standard mean deviationThis is the mean deviation as used during the fairing of new curves. This value can be adjusted for individualcurves, as described in paragraph 6.3.5.2.2 on page 44, Fair. See also the option [Uniform mean deviations](discussed on the next page).

Naming convention cross sectionsThis is the naming convention used for new frames, and can also be set in [Systemize polycurve names] (dis-cussed on page 58).

6.6.1.2 With curved surfaces

The settings here are identical to the settings described in paragraph 6.3.5.3.3 on page 54, Settings.

6.6.1.3 Configuration GUI

This tab is only accessible when activated from the Graphical User Interface (GUI) menu [Edit][Preferences...]-[Common Settings...].

Maximum plotting inaccuracyTo draw a line on the screen the line has to be divided into very many little straight line ’pieces’. Dividinga curved line into more straight line pieces increases the draw accuracy, but the calculation time will alsoincrease. With this option it is possible to enter the deviation of the mid of the segment and the curved linein millimetres.

Maximum angle of two adjacent lineletsComplementary to the previous option the maximum angle between two successive line pieces can be en-tered. The same rule can be applied here: the smaller the angle, the more accurate the curved line, but thecalculation time increases.

6.6.1.4 Title block lines plan

Here you can define (a maximum of five) text lines that will appear in the title block of the linesplan. The nameof the ship, the date and the used scale will always be written in this block.

6.6.2 Define special points

Special points are only shown in the Legacy GUI (discussed on page 85) for now. For the discussion of this topicplease refer to a Fairway manual from before 2012, the section titled "8.1 Define special points".


6.6 Settings and miscellaneous 71

6.6.3 Uniform weight factors

This will give all points in the model a neutral weight factor. For a discussion of point weights see section 6.1.1on page 28, Basics of Fairway.

6.6.4 Uniform mean deviations

While fairing a curve, see paragraph 6.3.5.2.2 on page 44, Fair, it is possible to adjust the mean deviation betweenthe curve and its points. This option will reset the mean deviation for all curves in the model to the default valuespecified in section 6.6.1.1 on the preceding page, Program setup.

6.6.5 Check network and lines

With this option it is possible to check whether all points are lying on a line. All lines in the network will bechecked one by one. Several columns with length, height and breath positions of every point of the line andlength, height and breath positions of the line ’at the point’ will be displayed. The last column displays thedistance between point and line. The goal of this option is to check whether all network points are lying on therulings. The eventual goal will be a network, in which the rulings have the desired geometry and all points arelying on the rulings.

6.6.6 Make all lines consistent

When this option is selected, new splines will be calculated for all segments of all lines (with a constant meandeviation of 0.0001 mm). This is done in such a way that the consistency between the spline rulings of all linesand the points of the network is guaranteed. This can result in a model that deviates from the desired model. Whendealing with a line in a plane (for example a frame) all points and splines will be pressed in that plane.

6.6.7 Remove all ”internal” points from all lines

With this option it is possible to remove all internal points of the lines in the network. The definition of internaland external points within Fairway has been given in section 6.1.1 on page 28, Basics of Fairway. For example, thisoption can be used before sending (converting) the hullform to the hydrodynamic program Dawson (MARIN).

6.6.8 Close vessel at deck

For some options it may be necessary to close the vessel at the top. This option connects the highest point of eachframe with the centerline plane.

6.6.9 Change color scheme

Attention

This option is deprecated, as it applies to the Legacy GUI (discussed on page 85) only. For the discussion ofthis topic please refer to a Fairway manual from before 2012, the section titled "8.2 Change color settings".

6.6.10 Define default window layout

Attention

This option is deprecated, as it applies to the Legacy GUI (discussed on page 85) only. For the discussionof this topic please refer to a Fairway manual from before 2012, the section titled "8.3 Define default windowlayout".


6.7 Show (rendered and colored) surfaces

This option is for the visualisation of the model. Sometimes it may be hard to interpret the model from viewing at thewireframe model, it might also happen that surfaces are defined in another way then the user had meant by line modelling.This option is of course also very valuable for making presentations or flyers for the company or the customer. Becauseof the interactive nature of this menu option, it is less thoroughly described than other menus in this manual.

Unlike the other main menu options, after hitting the <Escape> key the software does not return to the mainmenu, but generates a rendered image of the model. To return to the main menu without generating a renderedmodel, use the [Abort] function from the menu bar.

Drawing typeOne can choose between ’Normal’, which means the colors of the area under and above the waterlines havedifferent colors, and ’Shell plate layout’, which means every defined shell plate has a different color (seethe figure below).

Figure 6.30: Rendering shell plate layout

Use "curved surfaces"This option is nothing more than a link to section 6.6.1.2 on page 70, With curved surfaces. By changingthis value, you also change the setting in With curved surfaces. For a detailed description of this optionplease refer to section 6.6.1.2 on page 70, With curved surfaces.

Target dimension of planar elementsThis value is an indication of the level of triangularization. A large value may cause the model to look alittle rough, while a very small value may cause the computation to take a long time.

Representation of surface curvatureIn the graphical user interface of Fairway, the curvature of a line can be visualised. However, a curved sur-face is curved in two directions. To visualise the curvature, the curvature in both directions have to becombined to a single curvature parameter. In general, the curvature in the direction of the largest curvature(K1) and the curvature in the direction of the smallest curvature (K2) are combined in one of the followingways:

• Gausse curvature = K1 x K2

• Mean curvature = (K1 + K2) / 2

• Absolute curvature = abs(K1) + abs(K2)

6.7 Show (rendered and colored) surfaces 73

Fairway can determine these curvatures, and present them by means of a color distribution. The examplesbelow show the Gaussian and Mean curvature:

Figure 6.31: Gausse curvature (left) and mean curvature (right)

6.7.1 Notes about certain features

While the rendering is being displayed, the following options are available, among others.

Print imageAfter selection of the menu item [File][Print image] and pressing [OK], you are asked to enter a reductionfactor. The need for this option is due to the behavior of some version of the Windows operating system.Explanation: if you configured your printer to print at a high resolution, a very fine bitmap (high resolution)is generated by Fairway and sent to the printer. An high resolution image will be very large, which shouldnot pose any problem, apart from the Windows bugs that may cause the program to crash when using largeamounts of data. If you enter a reduction factor, the resolution, and hence the data size, will be substantiallysmaller.

Copy to clipboardWith the menu option [File][Copy to clipboard] a copy of the image is made to the clipboard. With Windows’function [Paste] it can be pasted into another document.

Select NearestFrom the [Setup] menu, you can choose [Select Nearest]. This means that if you click somewhere on themodel, the object nearest to the mouse pointer will be selected. This may be cumbersome to use wheneverthe model gets complicated since in that case it is very difficult to click exactly at the right place wheneverything is so close to each other. When this option is de-selected, the user can right-click on the modeland a box of possible selections will be presented.

Auto applySome options from the [Edit] menu have an [Apply] button. Pressing this button will execute the changesmade in the active box. However, when [Setup][Auto apply] is selected, execution of [Apply] is done ‘on-the-fly’. Example: if a user slides one of the slide-bars from the [Edit] menu, changes to the model are appliedsynchronic with the sliding of the bar. This can be desirable, but slow computers might not respond well.

Generate VRML fileIn a VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language)-file a 3D representation of the model is captured. Thisrepresentation can be visualized using a VRML-viewer. Various VRML-viewers are available as shareware



on the Internet. The options [File][Generate VRML 1.0 file] and [File][Generate VRML97 file] respectivelyproduce a file according to the original VRML 1.0 specification, and the more recent, and more popular,VRML97 format.

6.8 Export of hullform

With this option it is possible to export a hullform to a format that is used by other programs.After selection of the option [Scheepsvorm exporteren] from the Fairway main menu (discussed on page 34)

the following submenu appears.

6. Export of hullform

0. Create file in PIAS-ordinate format (.HYD file)

1. Create file in PIAS surface format (.TRI file)

2. Offsets to ASCII-file

3. All lines to AutoCAD DXF format in three 2D views

4. All lines to 3D AutoCAD DXF-POLYLINE format

5. All lines to 3-D AutoCAD NURBS format (Acad V14+)

6. All lines as NURBS to IGES

7. All faces to IGES

8. All lines to NUPAS import format

9. All lines to Eagle format

10. Relevant lines to Stearbear / Tribon format

11. Relevant lines to Schiffko format

12. Create finite element model

13. Create Dawson-model (MARIN)

14. Create Rapid Prototyping file (including segmentation)

15. Frames to Poseidon (Germanischer Lloyd)

16. Frames to Castor (ASC)

17. Relevant lines to ShipConstructor

18. Enable hullform to be used as a Hull Server shape data base

Warning

Make sure to read through section 6.8.1 on this page, Accountability regarding production fairing, beforeusing any of the options from this menu!

Attention

For the following export options you have the possibility to choose whether all lines should be exported oronly visible lines: All DXF formats, all IGES formats, and the formats for NUPAS and Eagle.

6.8.1 Accountability regarding production fairing

This section aims to inform the Fairway user and its contractor of the responsibility and liability regarding thefairing and fairness of hull shapes, especially when exporting data for production purposes. As an example, thiscovers a designer or yard that uses Fairway to fair the model of a ship, which is then passed on to a third party forfurther processing, like the generation of plate expansions and cutting data, or where the model is used to fill thehull server data base.


6.8 Export of hullform 75

6.8.1.1 Definition of production fairing

Production fairing is the process of performing systematic adjustments to the hull shape or its sections, until allinformation is applicable to the manufacturing of the ship directly and without any further adjustments.

6.8.1.2 Production fair delivery

When a hull shape is delivered to a third party with the statement that it is fair for production, then that party mayassume the correctness of that statement, and needs not verify the fairness of the shape. The responsibility is yoursalone.

6.8.1.3 Disclaimer

Fairway offers the tools to fair for production. The actual fairness is however dependent on the assessment bythe user and the time that has been invested into the process. The use of Fairway as a sole fact is by no means aguarantee that a hull shape is actually fair for production.

6.8.1.4 Conclusion

If a user exports a model for further processing, which has been faired with Fairway, then in case of fairnessproblems or derivatives thereof can in no way SARC be held liable. Solely the user is responsible for the fairnessof the hull shape.

6.8.2 Create file in PIAS-ordinate format (.HYD file)

All visible and invisible frames are converted to a regular PIAS format (.HYD-file). The converted hullform canbe used for all functions and calculations in PIAS. Result of conversion: ∗.HYD file.

It is advisable to check the hullform before conversion in for example Hulldef. If, for example, a frame isdefined only above the design draft, then the frame is still exported but the value of the ordinate area will be zerofor calculations!

6.8.3 Create file in PIAS surface format (.TRI file)

PIAS functions and calculations can be done based in this surface model, instead of based on the ordinate-modelas described in the previous option.

6.8.4 Offsets to ASCII-file

After selecting this option you can enter the number of decimals that you want the coordinates of the points to bewritten in the ASCII-file.

In the ASCII-file the lines of the hullform are defined as follows:

• name of the line

• number of points on the line

• longitudinal, transverse and vertical coordinates of every point (relative to to the intersection point of the aftperpendicular and the base line) in metres

• whether a point is a knuckle or not

• whether a point is an intersection or not. When the point is an intersection point, the intersecting line isgiven as well.

Result: ∗.OFF file.



6.8.5 All lines to AutoCAD DXF format in three 2D views

This option produces three different .DXF files. Each .DXF file contains one view (front, side and top view).Several translation parameters can be given to configure the layout of the drawings. This will not produce afinished linesplan, but is aids in setting up the drawing. The filename of the drawing is shortened with onecharacter, to make space for the numbers 1, 2 and 3.

Result: Three files ∗1.DXF, ∗2.DXF and ∗3.DXF.Another possibility to use AutoCAD is to install the PIAS Hull Server . This option is available on request.

With Hull Server any cross-section can be loaded into AutoCAD, regardless of whether or not this cross-section isinitially available in Fairway. The option works as follows: Start Fairway and AutoCAD, next activate the option inAutoCAD and specify the cross-section.

6.8.6 All lines to 3D AutoCAD DXF-POLYLINE format

With this option it is possible to export the 3D network to AutoCAD (version 11 or higher). After selecting theoption you can enter whether you want to convert the waterlines, frames and buttocks to real 3D lines or to 2Dlines. Both options result in the same ’picture’ in AutoCAD. But there is a difference. When you select the option’3D lines’, the lines are real 3D lines.

When 2D lines are selected, the model in AutoCAD will for the most part be composed of 2D lines, while theplane in which the lines lie will be rotated in such a manner that a 3D view appears. The difference will becomeclear when using editing modes in AutoCAD. For example, when using the AutoCAD command [Offset]. Thiscommand cannot easily be applied to real 3D lines.

After selecting the line type, you are asked to enter the maximum length of a line segment. In AutoCAD everycurve is represented by a so-called ’polyline’ that is composed of small line segments. The lower the segmentlength the finer and more accurate the curve representation.

At last you are asked to enter if you want the (non-internal) network points to be exported. When entering[Yes], points will also be generated at curve intersections in the AutoCAD model.

Result: .DXF file, which contains a ’polyline’ of every line. Fairway tries its best to generate ’polylinescomposed of circle segments’, which allow the curvature of the curve to be approximated. Unfortunately, theDXF format and AutoCAD itself cannot handle 3D polylines containing circle segments (i.e. lines of the Fairwaytype ’Spatial polycurves’). Therefore, 3D curves will be composed of straight line segments. As a consequence,’polylines composed of circle segments’ can only be exported when the above-mentioned option ’2D lines’ isused. This shows that the 2D history of AutoCAD is still shining through.

6.8.7 All lines to 3-D AutoCAD NURBS format (Acad V14+)

This option generates a DXF-file that contains the Fairway lines in the AutoCAD spline format (DXF group code100). Actually, this is a 3D NURBS curve, which is the same type as Fairway is using. So this DXF option is notusing an approximation like the two mentioned above, but translates the form coefficients of Fairway to DXF, sothat with a minimum of information transfer a maximum precision is attained.

Unfortunately, AutoCAD 2000 contains a serious bug, as a result of which the DXF file generated by Fairwaycannot be imported. After thorough experimentation we discovered that one can work around this bug if the DXFfile contains a whole bunch of fixed setups and choices. According to SARC it is undesirable that all kinds of setupsare dictated by Fairway; instead each user should be able to follow his own preferences. In the years 2000/2001SARC has communicated heavily with Autodesk in order to look for a particular DXF file content which causesthe bug not to appear, but finally we had to conclude that even at Autodesk they do not have sufficient knowledgeabout their own faults.

This phenomenon is for SARC a reason to discourage the use of AutoCAD 2000. However, if one wishes touse this software anyhow, two possibilities are open:

• Generate a DXF file for AutoCAD 14, import this one in AutoCAD 14, save as AutoCAD .DWG file, andfinally read that one into AutoCAD 2000.



• Use an external file structure. In order to be able to generate file for AutoCAD 2000, Fairway has an option(which is sold separately) to copy the DXF file structure from an external example file. This file on its turncontains a whole set of fixed setups which are apparently necessary for AutoCAD 2000. Fairway is deliveredwith an external example file, named fairtmpl.dxf, but with the DXF manual by hand each user can create amore appropriate example file if desired. At an hourly rate SARC can support the latter.

6.8.8 All lines as NURBS to IGES

IGES is an abbreviation of Initial Graphics Exchange Specifications. IGES encloses the international agreementsregarding the file format which is used for the exchange of information between different CAD systems.

Fairway uses the ’no.126, Rational B-spline’ for conversion. Also in this case is the closing remark of theprevious (DXF) section applicable.

Result: ∗.IGS file.

Attention

We know that Autocad 12 reads the IGES-no. 126 incorrectly. As to that, we do not know about other versionsof Autocad, but we do advise to check these conscientiously.

6.8.9 All faces to IGES

With this option an IGES file is created which contains the surface of the ship hull. Here a number of choices haveto be made:

• The type of surface, in IGES parlance. Please consult the documentation of the receiving system to find outwhich type is supported there. From Fairway two choices can be made:

– IGES type 114, the Parametric Spline Surface;

– IGES type 128, the Rational B-Spline surface (NURBS). This is the most commonly used type (forinstance the Spanish CAE system Foran can read such a file). Per face Fairway generates a single 4x4NURBS surface, so a surface with 16 control-points / vertices. The local geometry could be so complexthat the surface with only 16 control-points is too inaccurate, which is indicated by discontinuities atthe borders of the surface. The remedy in this case is to increase the number of surfaces, therefore thenumber of faces, therefore the number of intersection curves.

• Use the ‘curved surfaces’ capability, at least, when this option is available. In general if use is made of thisoption a smoother surface will be obtained. By the way, if the ’curved surfaces’ option is not used the systemwill have to remove internal points. These points will be deleted permanently, so it is to be recommendednot to save the hull model on disc anymore.

• Quadruple the number of IGES patches per face. Without quadrupling, in general one IGES surface perface in Fairway is generated. The alternative is four surfaces per face, which may give a better fit betweenneighbouring IGES surfaces.

• With flattened corners. This option is rather specific; by nature the surfaces will be slightly twisted in thevicinity of their corners, but with this option this twist is artificially flattened. In mathematical parlance thisis called ‘zero-twist’. The practical relevance is that with hull models which fit or fair badly, the commonmethod may lead to wild fluctuations in the IGES surface. In these cases ‘flattened corners’ could be chosen.

• Only faces which are bordered by visible lines. In this case only faces which are bounded by visible linesat all sides will be converted.

Result: ∗.IGS file.


6.8.10 All lines to NUPAS import format

This option is deprecated, there is a better alternative in the embodiment of the Fairway Hull Server . Therefore firsta warning is presented:

If you nevertheless apply this option, five files are generated, which can be used as 3D lines in NUPAS.Result: Frames.PNU, Waterlin.PNU, Buttock.PNU, Threed.PNU, Knuckles.PNU files.Three remarks can be made about the conversion to NUPAS:

• Around 1995 NCG and SARC agreed to create NUPAS files in a coded (which means: incomprehensiblefor humans) format. However, it appears that at present NUPAS may sometimes require uncoded files. Sothere is a switch where you can specify if you want to create coded or uncoded files, depending on the targetNUPAS configuration.

• The function of importing PIAS/Fairway files in NUPAS should be bought as an additional NUPAS option.For more information about importing files into NUPAS, or a possible import failure, please contact NCG.

• With this option a static model is created for NUPAS. A much more advanced possibility is the on-lineconnection between NUPAS and Fairway, by means of the Fairway Hull Server , in which a Fairway hull actsas a ‘shape database’ for NUPAS, which can supply NUPAS with all the shape information it requires. Inorder to enable a hull to be used as a NUPAS shape database, please use option Enable hullform to be usedas a Hull Server shape data base (discussed on page 80).

6.8.11 All lines to Eagle format

See also chapter 15 on page 151, Piaseagl: Import/export to and from Eagle. A file is generated that can be usedin Eagle. After selection of this option one is asked to enter the number of coordinates placed at a line in theASCII-file. Furthermore, the maximum number of points of a line can be entered. When using the <Enter> keythe number is not restricted.

Result: ∗.EAG file.

6.8.12 Relevant lines to Stearbear / Tribon format

A file, which can be used in Stearbear / Tribon, is generated.Result: ∗.STB file.

6.8.13 Relevant lines to Schiffko format

Two files, which can be used in Schiffko, are generated. Two methods of conversion are possible: by the networkor by the exact frames.

Result: QS001.DQS & LL0001.DLL files.

6.8.14 Create finite element model

With this option a ASCII-file is generated. This file contains two parts. The first part is a list of all faces withnumbers for each point of the faces. These numbers refer to a list of coordinates at the end of the file, where thisnumber corresponds with the coordinates of this point. These data can be used in a finite elements program. Itshould be noticed that this option exports the faces ’accidentally’ at hand. Optimization of face dimensions andface location does not occur. In other words, it is not a mesh generator.

Result: ∗.FEM file.

6.8.15 Create Dawson-model (MARIN)

Conversion to the hydrodynamic program which has been developed by MARIN. Before generating a DAWSONmodel, the ’internal’ network points on the lines have to be removed. The definition of ’internal’ network pointshas been given in section 6.1.1 on page 28, Basics of Fairway. When removing the ’internal’ network points, thehullform is not changed. If you want to keep the original model, you have to make a backup. When creating aDAWSON model, you are asked whether all ’internal’ network points have to be removed automatically. Whenentering <No>, no DAWSON model is created. When entering <Yes>, the following appears: ’For Dawson thehullform upper boundary must be a (possibly trimmed) waterline. Give the waterline level or the name of thatwaterline’. Only the hullform under the waterline is important in the Dawson program. Existing waterlines canbe entered by giving the height of this line in metres or the name of the line. It is also possible that you want toexport the hullform with a certain trim. Then you can define an angled waterline and enter this with its name. Anangled waterline can be defined as described in section 6.3.5.3 on page 52, New Planar Polycurve by Intersection.

Result: ∗.PNL file.

6.8.16 Create Rapid Prototyping file (including segmentation)

With this option a file can be made to send your model to a milling machine. When you choose this option thefollowing menu appears:

Create Rapid Prototyping file (including segmentation)

Model scale

Optimal

Split for three axis machining

Vessel is symmetrical relative to centerline

Maximum segment dimension perpendicular to base plane

Maximum segment dimension in one dimension of the base plane

Maximum segment dimension in the other dimension of the base plane

Minimum segment dimension perpendicular to base plane

Minimum segment dimension in one dimension of the base plane

Minimum segment dimension in the other dimension of the base plane

Format for output file(s)

Model scaleThis is the scale at which the model is made relative to the actual size.

OptimalWhen this option is answered with ‘Yes’, for all vertices of a face it is checked if they can be reached by themilling machine. Because this can be a lengthy calculation process for complicated shapes, you can alsoanswer the question with ‘No’. Now only of the centre of each plane is checked whether it can be reachedby the milling machine. If the planes are small enough, this is sufficiently precise.

Split for three-axis machiningWhen you are using a three-axis milling machine, the model can be subdivided in several parts so it can bemilled. This is illustrated in the following picture.


Vessel is symmetrical relative to centerlineWhen the vessel is symmetrical relative to the centerline, both sides of the hull can be milled at once. Oth-erwise only one side is machined.

Maximum segment dimensionHere you specify the maximum segment size, so it fits on the milling table.

Minimum segment dimension in one dimension of the base planeHere you specify the minimum segment size, to prevent that, depending on the material used, too thin piecesare milled.

Format for output file(s)Here you can specify the output format.

Attention1. The vessel must be closed to CL (including superstructure).

2. The vessel can only be split at continuous lines. Therefore there must be a sufficient number ofcontinuous lines, including at the (closed) deck.

6.8.17 Frames to Poseidon (Germanischer Lloyd)

Poseidon is a scantling-program of Germanischer Lloyd. With this option, all defined frames in Fairway are writtento a Poseidon readable format.

6.8.18 Frames to Castor (ASC)

Castor is a steelweight-estimation program developed by ASC. With this option, all defined frames in Fairway arewritten to a Castor readable format.

6.8.19 Relevant lines to ShipConstructor

6.8.20 Enable hullform to be used as a Hull Server shape data base

This option is nothing more but a test which indicates whether the model is sufficiently defined for its use in aproduction environment. If this is the case, an internal flag in Fairway is set by this option, which enables thecommunication between the Fairway Hull Server and a ‘client’ (i.e. NUPAS, Mastership or other CAD/CAMsoftware). This check verifies (to some level) that only proper data are being transferred between both programs.

Note that errors may still occur in the model: a line may be inadvertently be designated as a knuckle (ornot), the shape itself may not be satisfactory, etc. This type of errors are caused by (poor) modeling, not by the(interfacing of) software .

Background of this option: a client (CAD/CAM software) can communicate with the server (SARC’s FairwayHull Server : fwserver). This means that the CAD system is running on a computer and that it asks the Hull Serverabout shape characteristics of the hullform. The Hull Server determines the required data and sends them to theclient. This communication is dynamic and is not limited to the current Fairway set of lines. For instance, if a


6.9 Define/draw lines plan 81

client asks for a specific line which does not exist in the model, the Hull Server simply generates that new line andsends the coordinates to the client.

The FWserver is an executable that is made available by SARC (for free), please refer to a separate manualfor further details.

6.9 Define/draw lines plan

With Fairway it is possible to draw a linesplan. The user determines which views are drawn in the linesplan and wherethey are placed.

Please consult the manual from before 2012, the section titled "Main menu option 6: Define/draw linesplan".

6.10 Hullform transformation

With this option it is possible to transform the hullform by manipulating the Sectional Area Curve, the SAC. This can bedone by entering transformation parameters or by graphical manipulation of the SAC. Fairway recognizes two types ofSectional Area Curves:

• The target SAC, which indicates the goal of the design of the present hullform. This SAC can be generated, andcan also be manipulated interactively.

• The actual SAC. This is the SAC of the present hullform, which can be shown, but not be manipulated.

Hullform transformation

1. Generate the target SAC from the Lap-diagrams

2. Generate the target SAC from the present hullform

3. Specify hullform transformation parameters

4. Specify envelop lines midship section

5. Transformation of the target SAC

6. Perform complete hullform transformation

7. General rotation and scaling

In this menu two types of transformation can be recognized, at one hand the traditional ship hullform trans-formation, where e.g. main dimensions, block coefficient or Center of Buoyancy can be adapted, and on the otherhand a general (which means, not rooted in the naval architectural tradition) rotation and scaling. The first groupis situated under options 3 and 6, the second one under 7. Make sure that only one solid is activated, becausetransformation can be performed on one solid at a time only.

6.10.1 Generate the target SAC from the Lap-diagrams

After selecting this option, you have to enter whether the ship is a single or double screw ship. Then the target SACis constructed with the help of Lap-diagrams. The Lap-diagrams are based on the length between perpendiculars,analogous to PIAS. In this way, a conflict between contour and SAC can appear (mostly at the ends). For example,when the length of the waterline differs strongly from the length between perpendiculars, the SAC can have a bigsectional area at the aft perpendicular, omitting the ’tail’ behind the aft perpendicular. In this case the SAC has tobe manipulated and its area changed. With the options ’Generate the Sectional Area Curve from the Lap-diagram’and ’Generate the Sectional Area Curve from the present hullform’ this problem can be solved iteratively:

1. Start with the SAC generated from diagrams of Lap.

2. Modify the shape of the hullform between perpendiculars with the help of the SAC.

3. Generate the target SAC from present hullform.



4. The SAC does not have the right values of, for example, Cb and LCB. Transform the SAC in such a waythat the desired parameters are obtained.

5. Shape hullform with the help of the SAC.

6. When necessary, repeat the process from step two.

The diagrams of Lap are given at the end of section 6.A.2 on page 86, File format of diagrams for generationof a sectional area curve. The numerical representation of the Lap-diagrams are contained in the file kvslap.txt.In case you want to use modified diagrams, you can change the numbers in this file according to the instructionsin section 6.A.2 on page 86, File format of diagrams for generation of a sectional area curve.

6.10.2 Generate the target SAC from the present hullform

The target SAC is derived from the present hullform, replacing any previously existing target SAC. Any otherbuoyant solids are ignored, because transformation can be applied to one solid at a time.

6.10.3 Specify hullform transformation parameters

With this option you can specify the parameters for transforming the SAC. The following parameters can bedefined:

• Length between perpendiculars (Lpp)

• Moulded breadth (Bm)

• Draft (T )

• Block coefficient (Cb)

• Moulded volume (Λ)

• LCB (% of Lpp from Lpp/2)

• Midship coefficient (Cm)

• Transformation type

Definitions:Lpp, Bm and T as defined in [Name, dimensions and coefficients] (discussed on page 66).Cb = Λ/(Lpp ·Bm ·T )Cm = Largest ordinate area/(Bm ·T )

These data are displayed on the screen in two columns. The first column shows the desired value of theparameters (you can enter this value yourself). The second column gives the present value. The parameters referto the SAC, so they do not have to correspond with the hullform. With the [Copy] option all present values can becopied to the desired values.

One cannot be specific about the maximum allowable difference of the parameters that results in a decenthullform (after generating). The maximum difference strongly depends on the kind of hullform. For example,the allowed difference of block coefficient of a ’slender’ ship will be higher than the maximum difference whenconsidering a ’full’ ship. The ship with the small block coefficient has space in the middle and ends of the shipso the ship can be transformed more ’uniformly’. The ship with the large block coefficient has only space at theends. When entering a too big difference in block coefficient these ends will be ’inflated’ out of proportion or thetransformation will not succeed. Experience shows that the following maximum allowable differences are gooddirectives:

• maximum difference of block coefficient: ±0.05.


6.10 Hullform transformation 83

• maximum difference of LCB from Lpp/2: ±4% of Lpp.

• maximum difference of Cm: ± 0.02.

Do not try to overcome this by processing a transformation twice. Processing twice with, for example, anincrease of block coefficient of 0.05 is the same as processing once with an increase of block coefficient of 0.10.The limitation is not the procedure but the hullform!

The following transformation types are available:

• Inflate, deflate

• Increase / decrease parallel part

• Shift complete vessel

• Linear scaling

• Ordinate shift (Lackenby)

• Perpendicular to the shell

6.10.3.1 Inflate, deflate

This transformation type is also used in the hullform transformation in PIAS, covered in ?? on page ??, hulltran.When using this transformation type the desired values of the parameters are reached by ’inflating and deflating’the frames. The points of the frames are shifted transversely outwards or inwards. Care is taken to preserve theframe shape as much as possible. With this transformation type it is possible to change all parameters. This typeis the only type which deals with the midship coefficient (Cm). Only points of frames are shifted, all other pointsin the network remain unchanged.

6.10.3.2 Increase / decrease parallel part

When selecting this type, five input fields appear. In the first field you must enter the location of the aft side of theparallel part (in metres from aft perpendicular). The extending starts at this point and has a constant section equalto the section at this point. In the second field you can enter whether the ship has a sloping keel. When entering[Yes] the keel line of the inserted part has a sloped keel equal to the original slope. When a ship has a sloping keeland you enter [No] the produced part of the keel is horizontal. The keel is not continuous anymore, but containstwo knuckles. The extension can be entered by entering a new Lpp.

6.10.3.3 Shift complete vessel

When using this transformation type the ship is shifted as a whole. With this option you can simply shift, forexample, the base, aft perpendiculars etc. After selecting this option, three input fields will appear: longitudinalshift, transverse shift and vertical shift.

Alternatively, solids may be translated by moving all their polycurves at once using [Move polycurve] (discussedon page 54).

6.10.3.4 Linear scaling

All breadth- and/or height- and/or longitudinal coordinates are increased or decreased with the same factor. Thecoefficients will not change when using this option. The parameters you can enter for changing are: Lpp, Bm andT .



6.10.3.5 Ordinate shift (Lackenby)

The principle of this transformation1 type is that the frames are shifted in longitudinal direction while the ordinatearea and contour of the frame remain unchanged. This is done in such a way that the desired values of theparameters are reached. All points are shifted when using this option, contrary to [Inflate, deflate] (discussed on thepreceding page).

6.10.3.5.1 Perpendicular to the shell

With this scheme points of the hull are shifted normal to the hull, with a user-specified positive (outwards) ornegative (inwards) offset. The normal-direction can only be determined at the intersection point of two lines. Thisimplies that internal points must be absentfor this option and they will be removed by the program automatically.

Note that the normal-direction is undefined at knuckles; the program will take the average of the normalsaround the knuckle. It is unavoidable that undulations in the vicinity of knuckles may occur, particularly withnegative offsets (inward).

6.10.4 Specify envelop lines midship section

The specified envelop lines remain the boundaries during the hullform transformation. By specifying envelop linesyou prevent the lines of the network from going beyond these envelop lines. You can enter maximally ten pointsto define the envelop line. In this way it is possible to insert chines, deadrise etc. in this envelop line. By enteringthe vertical position in relation to base and the transverse position in relation to midship the points are defined.

6.10.5 Transformation of the target SAC

With this option the transformation is processed equivalently to the button [Fit] (discussed on page 62) in the action[Change the shape of the SAC]. If it is not possible to transform the hullform to the desired parameters, the followingerror code appears: ’Transformation failed’. The transformation of only the SAC is only possible when using thetransformation types [Ordinate shift (Lackenby)] or [Inflate, deflate]. All other types need a complete transformation(SAC and hullform). This can be done with the option [Perform complete hullform transformation] (discussed on thispage).

If you also want to fit the hullform, this can be done as follows:

• menu option [Perform complete hullform transformation]. You leave the transformation type unchanged. Theintermediate step of SAC transformation was not very useful. Straightaway [Perform complete hullform trans-formation] has the same result as first processing the SAC-transformation and after that the [Perform completehullform transformation].

• when desired another transformation type can be entered. After selecting the [Perform complete hullformtransformation] the hullform is transformed in such a way that the shiphull corresponds to the generated S-AC. The SAC remains unchanged because it has already transformed (the desired values of the parametershave already been reached).

• the hullform can be adjusted in the graphical user interface to the SAC. In this way you can control theprocess of changing the hullform. The calculation of the ordinate area can be processed and it is possible todisplay the target area (=area according to the SAC). The target area can be obtained by graphical manipu-lation of the polycurves or by transforming the frames automatically. Please refer to paragraph 6.3.5.2.8.1on page 51, Show Target Frame Area.

6.10.6 Perform complete hullform transformation

After selecting this option a global hullform transformation is performed, which implies that the SAC as well asthe hullform itself will be transformed, with the application of the transformation type as selected in the [Specifyhullform transformation parameters] menu. This transformation is only applied on the active solid. As such it would

1According to H. Lackenby (1950) ‘On the systematic geomatrical variation of ship forms’, Trans. INA, Vol.92, pp. 289–316.


6.11 Domains and surfaces 85

perfectly be possible to apply the transformation on other solids as well, but because quite some choices2 can bemade in this respect, it will require some thorough consideration to come to the optimal implementation.

Given a collection of parent forms, with the hullform transformation method a hullshape for a new design canbe obtained within a couple of minutes. In order to stimulate this ‘design’ method a library of about 20 parentforms are available at SARC, for general usage. These hullforms, from which the majority was created at DelftUniversity of Technology, can be obtained through www.sarc.nl/download (login as non-registered user, go todirectory parent hulls)..

6.10.7 General rotation and scaling

The hullform transformation methods of options [Specify hullform transformation parameters] and [Perform completehullform transformation] have arisen in the naval architectural tradition, and have a specific ship design background.Under the current option [General rotation and scaling] the general object transformation methods are collected.At this moment here the lineair scaling and the rotation around an arbitrary axis is implemented, but additionalvariants are foreseen. For all these transformation types the following apply:

• With function [Transform] the transformation will be executed.

• The transformation is performed on all visible solids.

This method is rather simple; for each of the three directions longitudinal, transverse and vertical a factor isgiven with which all coordinates will be multiplied. There is no fundamental difference between this option andthe earlier [Linear scaling] (discussed on page 83), albeit the latter is more naval architecturally oriented., becausethere target values for length between perpendiculars, moulded breadth and draft are applied, while the currentoption works with multiplication factors (which are applied at each transformation).

Here, must be given:

• An axis around which the object is rotated, which can be specified in two ways; either by specifying twopoints of the axis, or by the combination of one point and a direction.

• The rotation angle, clockwise (seen from the first point in the direction of the second, respectively in thedirection of the axis) is positive.

6.11 Domains and surfaces

Please consult a Fairway manual from before 2012, chapter "Main menu option 11: Domains and surfaces".

6.12 Legacy GUI

Attention

This option is deprecated. As soon as all functionality herein is implemented in Graphical User Interface(GUI) (discussed on page 35), this option will be removed. For the discussion of this topic please refer to aFairway manual from before 2012, the section titled "Main menu option 2: Graphical manipulation".

6.13 Alphanumerical manipulation

With the option [Alphanumerical manipulation] from the Fairway main menu (discussed on page 34) lines can bemanipulated on a purely numerical level.

Attention

This option is deprecated. As soon as all functionality herein is implemented in the Graphical User Interface(GUI) (discussed on page 35), this option will be removed. For the discussion of this topic please refer to aFairway manual from before 2012, the section titled "Main menu option 1: Alphanumerical manipulation".

2Determine the SAC with or without other buoyant solids, perform transformation on the buoyant, selected or all solids?




6.14 Manipulate groups of line places

Attention

This option is deprecated. As soon as all functionality herein is implemented in Graphical User Interface(GUI) (discussed on page 35), this option will be removed. For the discussion of this topic please refer to aFairway manual from before 2012, the section titled "Main menu option 3: Manipulate group of line places".

6.A Appendices

6.A.1 File extensions

Fairway stores model data in various files. The file names have a common stem, represented here by ∗, but differentextensions.

∗.fw1 Contains topological information consisting of points, edges and faces.∗.fw2 Contains general information about curves.∗.fw3 Contains geometric information in the form of NURBS vertices.∗.fw4 Contains special points.∗.fw5 Contains the name, main dimensions and coefficients, as well as the position sets and other

settings.∗.fw6 Contains data for any defined linesplans.∗.fw7 Contains data for defined domains and surfaces.∗.fw8 Contains data for geometric dependencies between curves (master-slave).

Warning

The files ∗.fw1, ∗.fw2, ∗.fw3, ∗.fw7 and ∗.fw8 depend on each other. Do not separate these when copyingfiles.

6.A.2 File format of diagrams for generation of a sectional area curve

The file kvslap.txt in the PIAS installation directory contains the numerical representation of the diagrams ofLap, which are used to generate a target sectional area curve (target SAC) based on main dimensions. This is a textfile, see section 4.4 on page 20, ASCII text file. The diagrams give a frame area at various ordinates (longitudinalpositions) through which the SAC can be fitted. The file format is explained here, followed by the representeddiagrams. The information from this appendix allows you to adjust these diagrams.

The first half of the file is for single-propeller ships. After the row with the word DUBBELSCHROEF follows theinformation for twin-propeller ships. Each of these parts consists of a diagram for the aft ship and a diagram forthe fore ship.

Each diagram starts with a row with two numbers. The first number is the number of prismatic coefficientsin the table, the second is the number of ordinates in the table. Next follow the prismatic coefficients, each on aseparate row. Finally follows the table of percent values of the midship area, each ordinate on a row of its own.The first column gives the ordinate number, followed by a column for each prismatic coefficient.

As an example you will find the representation of the diagram for the fore ship of single-propeller hulls below.

8 11

0.55

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.9

10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100


6.A Appendices 87

11 96.9 98.7 99.6 100 100 100 100 100

12 91.2 95.1 98.1 99.8 100 100 100 100

13 82.8 89.6 94.2 98.1 99.8 100 100 100

14 70.5 80.4 88.5 94.5 98.1 99.9 100 100

15 57.1 67.4 77.4 86.8 93.7 98.4 100 100

16 43.9 52.2 62.1 72.8 83.4 92.5 98.9 100

17 29.1 36.4 43.9 53.6 65.2 78.5 91.5 99.1

18 16.9 21.1 25.4 31.4 41.1 54.7 68.7 79.6

19 8.2 8.7 9.7 12.1 17.2 25.2 36.1 45.2

20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



Figure 6.32: Frame areas for single-propeller hulls.


6.A Appendices 89

Figure 6.33: Frame areas for twin-propeller hulls.



6.A.3 Customizing the dragger appearance (advanced)

The appearance of the draggers, with which the position of points and other elements can be manipulated, can beadapted to personal preferences. This is done by editing one or more geometry files.

The default geometry of the draggers is compiled into the program, but an image thereof is contained in the∗.iv files in the installation directory. These are not used by the program as it is, but it is recommended to leavethem untouched, for reference of the default geometry.

• arrowedTranslate1Dragger.iv contains the geometry for the linear dragger.

• arrowedTranslate2Dragger.iv contains the geometry for the planar dragger.

• arrowedTranslate3Dragger.iv contains the geometry for the spatial dragger.

You should know that the linear dragger is used twice inside the planar dragger, and the planar dragger is usedthree times inside the spatial dragger. So, in order to maintain uniformity, if one of these files is changed then asimilar change may be needed in the other files.

To use custom versions of these files, perform the following steps.

1. Copy the ∗.iv files from the installation directory to a directory of your choice. Do not rename the files.

2. Edit the files with a pure text editor, e.g. notepad.exe.

3. Define the environment variable SO_DRAGGER_DIR to point to the directory with the modified files.

4. You may have to restart the program before the changes take effect.

After a short introduction to the file format, we will give a few examples to experiment with.

6.A.3.1 File format

The format of the geometry files follow the Open Inventor File Format. You don’t need to know this format indetail in order to make simple changes, the contents of the files are quite comprehensible. But if the format isviolated then the file will fail to load and the dragger will have no geometry at all. If you cannot get it to work,just delete the file completely and the system will fall back to its compiled-in version.

We follow the convention that identifiers in all-capital letters are only used within the file in question. Mixedcase identifiers are referenced by the program to construct the final geometry of the draggers.

If you want to know more about the format, here are some pointers:

• MIT has a collection of files discussing the Open Inventor file format3. This material is dated andhas not been updated for a long time, but may still be relevant in many if not all respects.

• Chapter 11 of the Inventor Mentor (Josie Wernecke, 1994) discusses the file format from a programmer’sperspective. This book can be found on-line in HTML4 and PDF5.

• Most of the scene objects that are available to you, and their fields and accepted values, can be read fromthe programmer's documentation6. Look for sections called "FILE FORMAT/DEFAULTS", as forinstance in the class documentation of SoDrawStyle7.

3http://web.mit.edu/ivlib/www/iv.html4http://www-evasion.imag.fr/Membres/Francois.Faure/doc/inventorMentor/sgi_html/5http://www.ee.technion.ac.il/~cgcourse/InventorMentor/The%20Inventor%20Mentor.pdf6http://doc.coin3d.org/Coin/group__nodes.html7http://doc.coin3d.org/Coin/classSoDrawStyle.html#_details


http://web.mit.edu/ivlib/www/iv.html

http://www-evasion.imag.fr/Membres/Francois.Faure/doc/inventorMentor/sgi_html/

http://www.ee.technion.ac.il/~cgcourse/InventorMentor/The%20Inventor%20Mentor.pdf

http://doc.coin3d.org/Coin/group__nodes.html

http://doc.coin3d.org/Coin/classSoDrawStyle.html#_details

http://web.mit.edu/ivlib/www/iv.html

http://www-evasion.imag.fr/Membres/Francois.Faure/doc/inventorMentor/sgi_html/

http://www.ee.technion.ac.il/~cgcourse/InventorMentor/The%20Inventor%20Mentor.pdf

http://doc.coin3d.org/Coin/group__nodes.html

http://doc.coin3d.org/Coin/classSoDrawStyle.html#_details

6.A Appendices 91

6.A.3.2 Increasing the dragger size

The on-screen size of the draggers is held approximately constant, irrespective of the camera zoom level anddistance. This is accomplished by the use of a SoConstantSize node and its value field projectedSize. Let’ssay that arrowedTranslate1Dragger.iv contains the line

DEF ARROWED_TRANSLATE1_CONSTANT_SIZE SoConstantSize { projectedSize 50 }

This defines the identifier ARROWED_TRANSLATE1_CONSTANT_SIZE. Whenever this identifier is used in thefile, 1 unit size in the geometry following after it (within the same Separator) will approximately be 50 pixelson screen.

So, in order to increase the size of the dragger, it suffices to change the above line into

DEF ARROWED_TRANSLATE1_CONSTANT_SIZE SoConstantSize { projectedSize 60 }

You will want to repeat this exercise in arrowedTranslate2Dragger.iv and arrowedTranslate3-

Dragger.iv.

6.A.3.3 Changing the arrow head

Dragger axes are represented by arrows. The arrow head is constructed by means of a Cone node, with fields forheight (arrow head length) and bottomRadius (arrow head width). You could make the arrow more articulateby increasing bottomRadius, for example.

Again, you will want to repeat this exercise in arrowedTranslate2Dragger.iv and arrowedTranslate3-Dragger.iv.

6.A.3.4 Adjusting hotspot appearance

The “hotspot” of a dragger is the transparent sphere around the arrows that reacts to mouse clicks, which easespicking of the dragger. Depending on your monitor, you may find that the rendering is too weak or too strong.This can be corrected by adjusting the transparency field in the ARROWED_TRANSLATE?_HOTSPOT_MATERIAL

nodes in arrowedTranslate1Dragger.iv and arrowedTranslate2Dragger.iv. If you prefer to not see thehotspot at all, you can set transparency to 1.

If you have configured a white modelling view background, instead of the default, you way want to increasethe contrast by setting the red, green and blue values of the colour fields of the hotspot material to

diffuseColor 1.0 1.0 1.0

emissiveColor 0.0 0.0 0.0

specularColor 1.0 1.0 1.0

transparency 0.85

shininess 1.0

6.A.3.5 Switching off the feedback plane

When translating in a plane, the plane is rendered transparently in the corresponding color. If you do not like this,the plane can simply be disabled by editing arrowedTranslate2Dragger.iv as follows. Comment-out all linesbetween the opening and closing curly-braces of the identifiers arrowedTranslate2FeedbackOrthogonal-

Active and arrowedTranslate2FeedbackArbitraryActive, by putting a “#” in front of each of these lines.


Chapter 7

Preprocessor for Fairway

In order to facilitate the import of hullforms, a dedicated preprocessor for Fairway has been developed. Currently thepreprocessor is designed to read two formats, DXF and IGES, but in the future more curve or surface formats may besupported. Besides, two neutral file formats have been designed, which can be used by other applications to feed Fairwaydirectly. The application of this preprocessor is illustrated by the figures on this page, which show the successive stepsfrom unconnected 3-D lines, via wireframe model to solid model, of the mv ‘Berlin’ (which is one of the parent hullformsfor Fairway).

7.1 Drawing exchange formats

IGES and (particularly) DXF are popular file formats, and it is a lasting desire of users of Fairway to have thepossibility to import hull forms available in IGES or DXF format into Fairway. Unfortunately DXF and IGES arenot particularly suitable for that purpose. One must keep in mind that these two formats are essentially intendedfor drawing exchange, and not for the exchange of product model data, an aspect which is confirmed by thefull names of the acronyms (DXF: Drawing eXchange Format, IGES: Initial Graphics Exchange Specification).Unfortunately, this background inhibits a guaranteed error-free, automatic import of hullforms for every case. TheDXF and IGES files have to fulfill certain requirements, in order to be useful.

7.2 Neutral file formats for the exchange of curves and solids

From an import file, such as IGES or DXF, the shape of spatial lines can be imported. However, more often thannot it turns out that these lines do not form a coherent, unambiguous 3-D network. So we may encounter twocategories of data:

• Unconnected 3-D lines. Because such a data set lacks topological coherence, it does not, and cannot describea valid hull surface.

• Connected 3-D lines, which together describe a valid solid representation of the hull surface. A solid isvalid when three conditions are met:

1: Each edge starts or ends at another edge2: Each edge is only used twice by the faces3: The so-called Euler relation between the number of edges (E), the number of vertices (V) and the number

of faces (F) is fulfilled: V-E+F=2. In this relation the number of lines is irrelevant, because in this respect a line isjust a sequence of edges. An example is given if fig. 1, where V=13, E=19 and F=8 (Only 7 faces can be countedin fig. 1, but keep in mind that a valid solid must be closed, so there is also a face at the backside of this object.This backside face is bounded by the 11 outer edges).

For these two data categories we have defined two neutral file formats, to support exchange of product modeldata:


94 Preprocessor for Fairway

• CXF format (Curve eXchange Format)

• SXF (Solid eXchange Format) Imported files (such as DXF or IGES) are converted to CXF or SXF formatby the Fairway preprocessor. However, it is also possible for non-PIAS/Fairway applications to create a CXFor SXF file directly, see fig. 5 for a flow chart. The CXF and SXF files are plain ASCII files, with a syntaxas defined in the appendices 2 and 3.

7.3 Capabilities of this preprocessor

The preprocessor is designed to perform the following tasks:

• Import lines from DXF or IGES files

• Construct a wireframe model, based on these curves

• Construct a solid model, based on that wireframe

• Support a limited number of edit options, concerning shape and connections of curves

• Create CXF and SXF files, which can be imported in Fairway

The whole process is subject to the following limitations:

• Solids may contain no holes, also no through-holes

• The solid must be valid, it must conform to the Euler relation

• Lines may not coincide, neither partially nor whole

• Only one solid is supported

• The maximum number of lines is 4000, the maximum number of curves per line is 19, the maximum numberof points per curve is 1500

• The maximum number of (NURBS) vertices per curve is 500

• The maximum number of vertices, edges and faces is 4000, 8000 and 4000 respectively for DOS, and 12000,24000 and 12000 for the Windows version

• The maximum number of NURBS surfaces is 1000

Please bear in mind that this preprocessor is essentially an algorithmic conversion tool, and not a ship design orshape manipulation tool. The simple functions for line and wireframe editing which are available are only intendedto support the conversion process, they are neither intended nor suitable for intensive shape modifica-tion actions.More extended editing options or visual functions are not foreseen.

Appendix 1 gives a short overview of some theoretical aspects of solid modelling, which may help to under-stand the working of this preprocessor.


7.4 Main menu 95

7.4 Main menu

Import and edit lines and network

Import lines from DXF format

Import lines from IGES format

Merge single-connected lines

Edit line geometry

Generate wireframe model

Edit wireframe model

Check wireframe model (to some extent)

Generate solid model

Remove solid, lines or points

Tolerance (m)

7.4.1 Import lines from DXF format

With this option a 3D DXF file can be imported. Such a file contains dimensionless coordinates in an XYZ systemof axes. So before the preprocessor can read and process the DXF file, the correspondence between DXF’s X-YZ system of axes, and the longitudinal, transverse and vertical axes of the ship must be specified, as well as amultiplication factor on all DXF coordinates (for instance 0.001 when the DXF data are in millime-tres). Thesedata can be entered in the following menu:

Correlation between ship and import file

The X-axis of the import file corresponds with the vessels Longitudinal axis

The Y-axis of the import file corresponds with the vessels Transverse axis

The Z-axis of the import file corresponds with the vessels Vertical axis

Multiplication factor on the import coordinates 0.0010

DXF allows for quite a number of geometric types, from which the following ones are supported by thepreprocessor:

• DXF POLYLINE and DXF LWPOLYLINE. With these types a curved line is approximated by a chain ofmany small straight lines. A property of this representation is that knuckle points are not defined explicitly(because theoretically each point is a knuckle). So knuckles have to be added manually (in the preprocessor,or in Fairway). The preprocessor will generate a fair curve through all points of a polyline.

• DXF LINE. This is simply a straight line between two points. Using this type frequently has two dangers:1: Each DXF line is converted into a CXF line (which corresponds to a Fairway line). With a great numberof DXF lines, the maximum amount of 1250 lines for the preprocessor may easily be exceeded.

2: After importing DXF lines, one is left with a great number of unconnected short lines, which one way oranother have to be composed into a continuous line (or line segment).

• DXF ARC. A circular ARC.

• DXF SPLINE. Actually this is a NURBS curve. A property of this representation is that multiple segments(together forming a continuous line) are not connected in DXF. So they have to be connected later on.

7.4.2 Intermezzo on polylines



Attention

By its nature a polyline cannot distinguish between a knuckle and a non-knuckle point, and thus the preproces-sor considers a polyline as a continuously curved curve, which is smoothed right through all polyline points.If a line contains one or more knuckles, it must be split into separate curves (which must be represented bydistinct polylines) which meet at the knuckle points. If one continuous polyline is used for a knuckled line,the knuckles must be designated manually, which may be a cumbersome job on a line containing hundreds ofpoints.

It is a sad experience that more often than not only a model without explicit information about the knuckles isavailable. For those occasions the preprocessor is equipped with three auxiliary functions, which may help tocreate knuckle points automatically. However, it must be emphasized that those functions are only makeshifts,and are in no respect a replacement for proper definition of knuckles in the input data.

These functions come in three flavours:

• A user can specify an angle (in degrees, at the option ‘Minimum angle to recognize a knuckle in a polyline’)between two successive lines of a polyline, above which the common point of those two lines is treated as aknuckle

• A critical ratio between the lengths of two successive lines of a polyline may be specified. When an actualratio exceeds this critical one, the common point is treated as a knuckle

• A maximum length for a line of a polyline may be specified. If an actual length exceeds this maximum,additional points are inserted in that region (by linear interpolation). Those additional polyline points maygive the interpolating line a broader support basis.

7.4.3 Import lines from IGES format

With this option a 3D IGES file can be imported. Such a file contains coordinates in an XYZ system of axes.Before the preprocessor can read and process the IGES file, the correspondence between IGES’s XYZ system ofaxes and the longitudinal, transverse en vertical axes of the ship must be specified in the following menu:

Correlation between ship and import file

The X-axis of the import file corresponds with the vessels Longitudinal axis

The Y-axis of the import file corresponds with the vessels Transverse axis

The Z-axis of the import file corresponds with the vessels Vertical axis

IGES supports a large number of geometry entities. Currently two important entities are recognized by thepreprocessor:

• Entity type 110, the straight line.

• Entity type 126, the Rational B-Spline curve. Actually this is a NURBS curve;

• Entity type 128, the Rational B-Spline surface (a NURBS surface). Importing multiple NURBS surfacescan only be performed successfully, if the surfaces have been defined sufficiently accurate, so that they meetexactly at their common boundaries.

• Entity type 406, forms 7 and 15. This concerns the name, which is being recognized and skipped.

7.4.4 Merge single-connected lines

After an IGES or DXF file is read, lines may have been created, which actually form a part (a segment) of a longerline. With this option each line end is tested whether it coincides with another line end (within the user-specifiedtolerance). If the line end coincides with only one other line end, the two are merged, and saved as two distinctsegments of one line.


7.4 Main menu 97

7.4.5 Edit line geometry

This option shows all available lines. It is also possible to remove lines, or to edit the location, name or type of aline. With ‘Enter’ the points of a line (in case the line was imported as a polyline) or the NURBS vertices (in casethe line was imported as ‘NURBS) are shown. In this menu the following actions are possible:

• Merge a line with another one (Function ‘Merge’)

• Split a line into two distinct lines (Function ‘Split’)

• Remove or add polyline points

• Reverse the line sequence (Function ‘Orientation’)

• Toggle knuckles points of polylines (Function ‘Knuckle’)

• Edit polyline points or NURBS vertices

Attention

Polyline warning After creating, removing or adding new polyline points the shape of the line is re-created(by fairing a curve through all polyline points). It might be possible that original polyline points have beenremoved (manually, or by an executed function), in which case an unwanted line shape might be created.

7.4.6 Generate wireframe model

This option creates a wireframe model, based on the geometry of all available lines. It tries to find all intersec-tion points (within the specified tolerance) between all lines. Those intersection points are included in a list ofvertices, and the line parts between adjacent vertices are included in a list of edges. These lists of vertices andedges constitute a wireframe model, and form the basis for the construction of a solid model.

Attention

Polyline warning When this function is executed, it asks whether or not existing (internal) wireframe pointsmust be removed. Please be warned that in case of a polyline the wireframe points are also polyline points,so after removal of the points, and a possible subsequent re-creation of the curve through the polyline points(for example with the main-menu option ‘Edit line geometry’) the shape may be distorted.

7.4.7 Edit wireframe model

With this option connections between lines are displayed, and the following tasks may be performed by the user:

• Edit name of each line

• Remove or edit points of the line (remark: These actions only apply to the connections of the wireframe.The line geometry is not affected, so, in case of a polyline, no new line shape is created through the modifiedpoints)

• Disconnect lines from other lines (function ‘Disconnect’)

• Connect lines with other lines (function ‘Connect’)

So, if due to a lack of accuracy no proper wireframe is created with the function ‘Generate Wireframe Model’,with this menu option a user can manually specify the proper connections between the lines.



7.4.8 Check wireframe model (to some extent)

This option performs a limited test of the validness and completeness of the wireframe model. Errors are reportedin a file with extension .log. Two aspects are tested:

• Whether line ends are actually connected with other lines (which is a requirement)

• Whether lines, or parts of lines, coincide with other lines (which is prohibited)

Please bear in mind that fulfilling these two tests does not guarantee that the wireframe can be converted intoa solid. One failure reason, for example, could be that not every line is connected to another line at the appropriatelocations. By its nature such a test is impossible on a wireframe model, and it remains the responsibility of theprogram user, or the supplier of the imported file, to supply a valid wireframe model.

7.4.9 Generate solid model

This option creates a list of faces, based on an available wireframe model, according to the method as describedin appendix 1. If anomalies are detected, they are reported in a log file (with extension .log). If no valid solid canbe found, please study this file carefully, because it may give indications about the regions where the cause of theinvalidness can be found. As an aid for the program user, in this file are listed:

• Vertices which leave the wireframe unconnected at removal

• Edges which do not bound exactly two (candidate) faces

• (Candidate) faces which violate the Euler Equation V-E+F=2

• All tests of menu option ‘Check wireframe model (to some extent)’

7.4.10 Remove solid, lines or points

This option can remove the following entities:

• All internal points. Internal points are points of lines, not connected to any other line

• The solid model and the wireframe model

• Everything (that means, all lines, as well as the solid and wireframe model)

7.4.11 Tolerance (m)

With this option the user can specify the tolerance (in metre) which is used with the options ‘Merge single-connected lines’ and ‘Generate wireframe model’. Points which have a mutual distance smaller than this toleranceare considered as one point, and the lines containing those points are connected at that location.

7.5 Using a CXF file in Fairway

Because a CXF file contains information of the kind "Unconnected 3D lines" the topological data (such as positionrelative to other lines, or connections with other lines) are missing, and only the shape of the lines can be importedin Fairway, replacing the shape of an existing line. So for each line in Fairway, the desired line of the CXF formatmust be manually identified before its shape can be used.

In Fairway’s alphanumerical menu (where all line names are displayed on screen) a function ‘imPort’ is in-cluded. After activating this function the CXF file is opened and read, and a list of available CXF lines is displayed.The shape of a CXF line can be imported when one of these lines has been selected (and ‘Enter’ has been pressed).

However, when a line contains one or more knuckles, the correspondence between the sequences of the pointsof the original and the new line is not obvious in all cases. Therefore, the following rules apply:


7.6 Using a SXF file in Fairway 99

• When the number of knuckles of the new line is equal to the number of knuckles of the original line, theshape of the CXF line can be imported. However, possible internal points in the CXF line are not included.

• When there are no knuckles or internal points in the original line, a CXF line with an arbitrary number ofpoints can be imported. If the CXF line also contains internal points, the user is asked whether these alsohave to be included into the line.

Finally, it is noted that the preprocessor is equipped with more error-checking capabilities than Fairway. Soeven if an application creates a CXF file directly, it is advised to check this file by reading it with the preproces-sor.

7.6 Using a SXF file in Fairway

When Fairway is started with a new project, the user can make choices regarding the way to start this project. Oneof those choices is to import a complete hull from an SXF file.

7.7 Final remarks on file formats

Regardless of the data carrier (DXF or IGES), NURBS are to be preferred above polylines. The reason is that thepreprocessor converts polylines to NURBS anyway, and that conversion can always lead to a reduced accuracy;

• For applications that must frequently export their hull forms to Fairway, it is recommended to develop aninterface routine that writes an SXF file directly. With a solid object directly available in an SXF file, thereis no need for the preprocessor to reconstruct the shape of the solid, thus saving time and avoiding possiblereconstruction anomalies

• Another possibility for exporting software is to create an SXF file, with only a wireframe model (consistingof vertices and edges). The preprocessor can read that wireframe, and convert it into a solid model (includingthe faces)

• Application of importing objects in Fairway, by means of CXF and SXF files, cannot only be thought ofin the field of ship hullform transfer, but also in combination with relatively simple application programswhich generate parametric volumes, such as cilinders, gas tanks, NACA profiles, keels, rudders, etc.

7.8 A brief introduction to topology and connectivity of solids

A wireframe model is an open approximation of a solid, constituted by edges and vertices (‘vertices’ is the plural of‘vertex’) on the boundary of the solid. For example, the object of fig. 1.1 contains 4 vertices and 6 edges. However,because the wireframe model does not describe the closed object it is ambiguous. A proper unambiguous wayto describe a solid object is the method of boundary modelling, where explicit information about the faces isincluded. Our example of fig. 1.1 contains 4 faces.

There is a well-known relationship between the number of vertices (V), edges (E) and faces (F); for solidswithout trough-holes this so-called Euler relation is V-E+F=2. It can be verified easily that this relation is indeedapplicable on fig. 1.1.

The necessity of explicit face information to describe a solid unambiguously can be demonstrated with thehypercube of fig. 1.2. With wireframe information only (vertices and edges) the actual shape of the objectcannot be determined. By the way, please note that this object has one through-hole, so the Euler relation is notapplicable here. So an important task of the preprocessor is the recognition of the faces between the edges. Ingeneral, this problem is unsolvable (for example, the faces of the hypercube cannot be determined automatically),but under some constraints practical, iterative methods are available. One of those methods is implemented in thepreprocessor. This method implies the following constraints:

• The solid must be closed, without through-holes

• The solid may not be 2-connected.



A 2-connected solid, is a solid where the removal of 2 vertices (and their incident edges) separates the solid intwo parts. For example, the object of fig. 1.3 is 2-connected, because the removal of vertices 1 and 2 leaves thesmall inner part unconnected from the larger, outer part. By the way, one additional edge between the vertices 3and 4 would make this object not 2-connected anymore.

One might perhaps expect at first sight that this freak object is unlikely te be encountered when importingship’s lines. However, consider a very simple initial body plan of fig. 1.4. This one is highly 2-connected, because24 combinations of vertices exist, which leave the object separated at deletion (vertex-pairs 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 2-5, 3-4,4-7, 5-6 etc.).

A few more remarks can be made about this figure:

• Apart from the theoretical aspects of 2-connectivity, one can also imagine that this wireframe cannot beconverted into a solid automatically, because explicit information about inside and outside is missing.

• Extra waterlines or buttocks, but even the inclusion of one additional edge, between vertices 1 and 20, wouldmake this object not 2-connected anymore.

It would lead us too far to discuss all theoretical aspects, but contrary to our previous statements that 2-connected objects are unsuitable to be converted into solids, there are some exceptions where 2-connectivity isallowed:

• Some areas of 2-connectivity are acceptable, in the case when an unconnected part of the wireframe formsone face with the vertices which makes the object 2-connected. In fig. 1.4 this is, for example, the case withvertices 2 and 3, whose removal leaves vertex 1 unconnected from the rest, which does no harm becausevertices 1, 2 and 3 are all part of one valid face.

• For ‘open’ objects, such as the one of fig. 1.4, 2-connectivity may be allowed.

All these considerations have led to a two-stage face recognition procedure in the preprocessor:

• Initially an object is assumed to be not 2-connected, and faces are generated accordingly. When a validcombination is found the generation process ends, because it is a theoretically valid solution.

• When no valid combination of faces is found, intermediate results and connectivity data are printed in a logfile. Finally the faces are constructed under the assumption that the object is 2-connected. However, thissecond stage may fail to find a proper solution.

7.9 Syntax of Curve eXchange Format

• A CXF file is a plain ASCI file, with an even number of lines. Each pair of lines consists of a code (the firstline) and an argument (the second line). The code defines the meaning of the argument.

• After the code a # may be placed, which precedes comment. Text after the # is ignored.

• When a line starts with a #, it is recognized as comment, and ignored.

• All units are metres, sequence of vectors is Length, Breadth, Height. SB=+, PS=-.

Notes

• Currently the codes 30, 50, 60 and 70 are not used in Fairway, but in the future they may be used.

• From a line either a polyline or NURBS representation has to be given. The preprocessor determines bothrepresentations and writes them in the CXF file.

• Concerning the NURBS, please remember that number of vertices + order = number of knots.

• Polyline points may be specified directly (code 3100) or as reference to a solid vertex (code 3110). Forapplication in combination with the SXF file, finally, only references must be used.

• Knuckle line information (code 2010) may be omitted. The default value is ‘no knuckle’.


7.10 Syntax of Solid eXchange Format 101

7.10 Syntax of Solid eXchange Format

• Similar to the CXF file, an SXF file is a plain ASCI file, with an even number of lines. Each pair of linesconsists of a code (the first line) and an argument (the second line). The code defines the meaning of theargument.

• After the code a # may be placed, which precedes comment. Text after the # is ignored.

• When a line starts with a #, it is recognized as a comment, and ignored.

• Vertex locations are in metres, sequence is Length, Breadth, Height.

All faces must be oriented clockwise (seen from the outside)Notes:

• Currently the codes 30, 50, 60 and 70 are not used in Fairway, but in the future they may be used.

• An edge orientation (as used in the face definition) of +1 means the edge is used for that face according tothe sequence of definition of that edge. An orientation of -1 means it is used for that face in the oppositedirection.


Chapter 8

Hulldef: Hullform definition

This is a future PIAS module that will contain the functionality of the following existing modules:

• Edithull

• Appends

• Opening - Windmom

• Pias2dim

• Pias3dim

• Piassway

• Piasshmo

• Ascpias

Please consult a PIAS manual from before 2012 for the documentation of these modules.


104 Hulldef: Hullform definition


Chapter 9

Hulltran: Hullform transformation

This module enables you to change the length of the parallel body and to transform an existing hullform using the followingparameters:

• Length (linear scaling factor)

• Beam (linear scaling factor)

• Draught (linear scaling factor)

• Block coefficient

• Longitudinal centre of buoyancy

• Midship coefficient

The original hullform (the motherform) is used as a base and remains unchanged. The transformed hullform (thedaughterform) should have its own filename and has no connection with the motherform at all.

9.1 Main menu

Main menu

1. hullform_filename_transformation

2. hullform_hullform_transformation

3. hullform_change_length

4. hullform_stop

9.1.1 Filename transformation

Please specify the filename for the transformed hullform (must be different from filename of the motherform).You can use ‘&’ to replace the path of the motherform. (For an overview of all keys: see chapter ‘General’).

9.1.2 Hullform transformation

The following parameters can be modified:

• Length (no limitation)

• Beam (no limitation)

• Draught (no limitation)


106 Hulltran: Hullform transformation

• Block coefficient (limited to + 0.05 change)

• Longitudinal centre of buoyancy (limited to + 4% change)

• Midship coefficient (limited to + 0.02 change)

9.1.3 Change parallel body

The change of the parallel body will be executed forward of the last frame in the aftship (For the division betweenaftship and foreship see chatpetr 80). There are no limitations on increasing the length of the parallel body. Adecrease of the length of the parallel body is defined by entering a negative length. This decrease is limited to halfthe length of the parallel body.

• When changing the length of the parallel body, the question is asked whether the vessel has a sloped keelline.In that case on APP and FPP the heights above base of the (moulded) keelline should be given. The programwill then shift the ordinates vertically, to match the slope of the keelline.

• When the question ‘Shift baseline to the intersection between keelline and half length’ is answered with‘Yes’, then, assumed that at the motherform the baseline intersects the keeline at half length, the same willoccur with the daughterform. When ‘No’ is answered, the baseline will keep its position with respect to theaftship.

9.1.4 Stop, without saving

The programme is terminated without saving the last made changes.

9.1.4.1 Remarks

• Give the daughterform a new name so it is recognised on the output of the hullform.

• The input data are printed during the execution of this module. Therefore the printer has to be switched onall the time.


Chapter 10

Newlay: internal geometry design

Newlay1 is the PIAS module with which the internal geometry of the ship is recorded, managed and used. It goes withoutsaying that that internal geometry can consist of bulkheads, decks, compartments and other spaces, but it may alsocontain additional data, like the weight group of the volume of a specific compartment, or the sounding-pipe geometry.A description of the background of Newlay can among others be read in the paper www. sarc. nl/ images/ pdf/publications/ international/ 2011/ compit2011_ dekoningh. pdf , but, in brief, Newlay offers the followingmodelling possibilities:

• Defining compartments through compartment limits (equivalent to the manner in which in module Compart, at theprecursor of Newlay, compartments are defined).

• Defining continuous bulkheads and decks, between which the compartments are formed.

• Support by means of reference planes, to which compartment coordinates as well as bulkheads and decks mayrefer.

The first two methods are mutually convertible, which means that one is able to convert from bulkheads/decks tocompartments as well as vv. Briefly, Newlay offers, furthermore, the following functions in the field of internal geometry:

• Calculation of tank tables, trim correction tables etc., in a variety of formats.

• Output of a schematic tank plan and 3D views of compartments.

• Conversion from and to the precursor of Newlay: PIAS module Compart.

• Definition of the layout of a 2D subdivision plan, and its output to paper, bitmap or DXF file. This subdivision planmay function as basis of the general arrangement plan.

• Function as server of internal geometry, which is able to respond to requests of other software applications. So, forexample, the shape of a deck or of a compartment can be made available to other (CAD)software upon request.

• Import and export of the internal geometry in XML format.

10.1 Definitions and basic concepts

10.1.1 Definitions

PlaneA plane is endless, and can have any position in the space, can therefore also be angled. But every cross-section of a plane is straight, so it cannot be curved or twisted.

1This module should have been called Layout, but there existed an earlier PIAS module with that name and that’s why this module hasbeen baptized NewLayout, abbreviated to Newlay.


www.sarc.nl/images/pdf/publications/international/2011/compit2011_dekoningh.pdf

www.sarc.nl/images/pdf/publications/international/2011/compit2011_dekoningh.pdf

108 Newlay: internal geometry design

Physical planeA physical plane is a plane which can be limited, and can be the separation between subcompartments. Asa rule, physical planes are used to model bulkheads and decks.

Reference planeA reference plane is a plane to which the sizes of other entities can be normalized. The use of referenceplanes can be useful for later design modifications, but its use is not obligatory.

CompartmentA compartment is a closed, liquid-proof space in the ship; as a result, one can pour water in a compartmentand the water will not get outside of it. As for the manner of modelling, there is no distinction between awet compartment, a dry compartment, a hold, an engine room or a closed quarter deck. In short, anythingthat is watertight is a compartment for PIAS. A compartment is built from one or more subcompartments.

SubcompartmentA subcompartment is a ‘logical’ building block of a compartment. A subcompartment has no physicalmeaning, the concept has only been introduced to make it a bit orderly for people to define a complex com-partment. A subcompartment can be positive or negative, in the first case the shape of the subcompartmentis added to the others, in the second case it is deducted. A subcompartment can be one of three differenttypes, which will be explained below:

With coordinatesA subcompartment of the type ‘with coordinates’ is simply limited by typed coordinates (which may referto a reference plane). The user is free to define subcompartments of this type overlappingly, or to let holesexist between them.

Space generated between planesA subcompartment of the type ‘space generated between planes’ coincides with the space generated betweenphysical planes. This type of compartments is unique, and cannot overlap between themselves.

External PIAS ship shapeA subcompartment of the type ‘external PIAS ship shape’ is meant for a subcompartment being too complexfor one of the other types, for example because its limits are curved, such as those of a gas tank. Such asubcompartment can be defined with a PIAS shape design or definition module, as if it is a regular shipshape. Subsequently, that ‘ship shape’ is indicated as subcompartment, after which it is integrally includedin all following steps and calculations.

Attention

From these definitions follows an important difference between a subcompartment of the type ‘space gener-ated between planes’ and the other types. For those other types have their own shape definitions, that formone whole with non-geometric characteristics, such as their names and permeabilities. But a space generatedbetween physical planes always has a shape of its own, also without a subcompartment being assigned to it.Normally, a subcompartment of the type ‘space generated between planes’ is assigned to such a space, butthat is not necessarily so. When no subcompartment has been assigned to such a space, that is reported bythe program as non-assigned space. Functions are available in the GUI to assign such a space to or to unlinkit from a subcompartment. The last is simply done by removing the subcompartment from the tree view, thespace between the physical planes will remain, however.

10.1.2 Use of different types of subcompartments

There are three types of subcompartments, as defined above. They can be used interchangeably at random, the useof different types of subcompartments within one compartment is also allowed. Although the user is entirely freeto choose the type, there are still a few directions to be given:

• The use of physical planes is practical, firstly because the nomenclature can be made much faster with them,and secondly because the bulkheads and decks are known explicitly with them, which may be useful in theevent of subsequent work or computer applications. The subcompartments that are genenerated between


10.1 Definitions and basic concepts 109

the planes are of the type ‘space generated between planes’, the word speaks for itself. Although this typeof subcompartment in principle can be applied anywhere, it could be practical to limit its application tothe larger spaces that are bounded by the primary physical planes. Suppose one would like to define, forexample, a fuel oil day tank in this manner, then that would very well be possible, but then one would endwith six physical planes. And in the event of a multiple of such tanks the number of physical planes willbe very large, that large that one can easily lose track of the situation. Such a tank could perhaps better bedefined as ‘with coordinates’, if necessary using reference planes so that later design modifications can beprocessed faster.

• The type ‘with coordinates’ can be used anywhere where the subcompartment boundary consists of thehull shape, combined with (maximally twelve) boundary points. This definition is conceptually simple,overlapping subcompartments can also be defined with this, by the way, which can be an advantage or adisadvantage, that is not relevant right now, but one should be well aware of this.

• The type ‘external PIAS ship shape’ is meant for subcompartments with non-flat boundaries. Subcompart-ments with flat boundaries (which may very well be angled) can be defined in a more practical mannerwith another type. By the way, subcompartments of the type ‘space generated between planes’ and ‘withcoordinates’ are always trimmed by the ship shape, save that of the type ‘external PIAS ship shape’.

10.1.3 Naming convention for compartments etc.

Names of (sub)compartments, reference planes and physical planes can be 50 characters long, while all visiblecharacters are allowed. Compartment names must be unique, which is not a basic requirement in itself, but inorder to keep a compartment collection orderly it has been decided upon to require this. Names of physical planesneed not be unique, it might occur that there are planes with different shapes, but that they are still at the sameposition, so one can give them the same name. It is doubtful whether this is practical, but that is up to the user.Reference planes have infinite dimensions, so there is no need to have planes at the same position, and it maytherefore be required that their names are unique. Subcompartment names only matter within one compartment,so it is not necessary that they have a unique name. When copying a (sub)compartment or reference plane, thecopy gets the name of the original with the addition ‘(copy)’. At least, when there is place left for that and whenthat name is not yet in use, otherwise the copy keeps its original name.

10.1.4 Links to subcompartments

As mentioned at the definition of subcompartments, these can be positive or negative. It is not necessary, but apositive and a negative subcompartment are often used to model exactly the same space. For example, a fuel oilday tank in the ER as positive subcompartment, and exactly the same space as negative subcompartment whichis deducted from the ER. It may be practical in such cases to define the shape of that subcompartment not twice,but only once, and to make a link to the second one. The advantage of this is that a geometry modification in onesubcompartment is directly applied to the second one.

Such a link only applies to the shape and the name, not to the permeabilities (µ). There are sound reasonsfor that, because permeabilities may vary, like in our example where when the µ of the MK is 85%, that of thesubcompartment to be deducted must also be 85%, because there would be more volume deducted than added.But the µ of the fuel oil day tank is of course 98% (or any other permability chosen by the user).

10.1.5 Processing the hull shape

Subcompartments of the type ‘with coordinates’ and ‘space generated between planes’ can be defined beyond thehull shape, typically to plus or minus infinite (that is defined by typing a resp. <-> instead of a number,van infinite). In that case, the intersections between subcompartment and hull shape are determined automatically.The hull shape itself can be defined through frames (with module Hulldef) or as solid model (with Fairway). Inthe latter case, an entire planes model of the hull is available with which any subcompartment intersection canbe made. But in the event of a frame model, there are only frames, there is nothing in between. That doesnot matter at all, PIAS has (traditionally) sufficient methods to arithmetically find an adequate solution, but for


drawing the program must be driven back on interpolation of a subcompartment plane with those frames. In caseof a longitudinal plane, such as a deck or longitudinal bulkhead, there will be in general sufficient intersectionsbetween that plane and the frames, so that a sufficiently accurate intersection line can be drawn. But in the eventof angled bulkheads it is very well possible that there are only a few intersections with the frames. In theory, theintersection line can be drawn on the basis of these intersections, but as their number is small, its accuracy can below. There are two options here, the first one is to give a shrug, because we are only dealing with a picture and notwith the calculation results, and the second one is a more complete definition by means of more frames, that canbe quickly generated, for example, with Fairway.

10.2 Main menu

Having started up Newlay, one enters the main menu, the various options of which are explained in more detail inthe following sections.

Main menu

1. Graphical User Interface of planes and compartments

2. Compartment list, calculation of tank tables etc.

3. Other lists, and program configurations

4. Threedimensional presentation

5. Subdivision plan

6. Conversion, and import and export of subdivision data

7. File and backup management

10.3 Graphical User Interface of planes and compartments

10.3.1 GUI components

Figure 10.1: GUI.


10.3 Graphical User Interface of planes and compartments 111

An example of the GUI (Grafical User Interface) is shown in section 10.3.2.2 on the following page, Left mousebutton and modus. The GUI can consist of eight windows:

• Three orthogonal cross-sections, namely a transverse cross-section, longitudinal cross-section and horizon-tal cross-section.

• A 3D (rendered) view.

• A tree view window with a tree of compartments and subcompartments.

• A tree view window with physical planes.

• A tree view window with reference planes.

• Possibly a constraint management tree view window in which design prospects can be included. For thetime being, this constraint management mechanism is undiscussed in this manual.

Right at the bottom of the GUI window a status line is displayed, subdivided in five boxes:

• The first box contains a short explanation of the function of the menu bar, when the mouse pointer standson it.

• The second box displays the selection mode (see section 10.3.2.2 on the next page, Left mouse button andmodus).

• The third box dynamically displays the coordinate (L, B and H) of the pointer position in the orthogonalviews.

• The fourth box dynamically displays the name of the physical or reference plane that is closest to the mousepointer.

• The fifth box dynamically displays the name of the compartment and/or subcompartment where the mousepointer stands above.

Furthermore, in the upper bar the GUI has a number of functions that have been subdivided in subfunctions.Those functions can either be carried out directly, or can be ’hanged’ to the mouse button, which mechanism isdiscussed in section 10.3.2.3 on the following page, How long stays a function assigned to a mouse button?. Thefunction bars under [Compart], [Refplane] en [Plane] are subdivided by a horizontal dividing line. The functionsabove that line are only related to the tree view window in question, the functions under the line are generallyapplicable.

10.3.2 General operations and modus

10.3.2.1 Mouse buttons

The mouse buttons are used as follows:

• The left button can be used for two things, namely a) the selection of compartments, physical planes andreference planes, or b) performing functions with it.

• Pressing the right button and subsequently moving the mouse is for display. In the three orthogonal viewsthat is choosing the intersection locations (unless one has opted for pan at the tool bar at the left side of thatwindow). And in the 3D view that is default rotation (unless one has opted for another display function atthe tool bar at the left side of that window, for example, pan or clip).

• Shortly clicking the right button in the 3D view brings up a specific menu with which colors, translu-cency and lighting can be set, or a screen print or 3D model (in VRML-format) can be stored in a file,see section 10.3.2.4 on page 113, Operation in the 3D subwindows for a more detailed explanation of thepossibilities in the 3D view.


• Keep on pressing the middle button and then moving the mouse is panning.

• The mouse wheel is zooming, as well in the 3D view as in the orthogonal views.

Furthermore, one can carry out the (for MS Windows) usual actions in the tree view windows such as draggingof compartments, subcompartments, physical planes and reference planes. With function button <F2> one canchange a name into such a tree view window.

10.3.2.2 Left mouse button and modus

The left mouse button is meant default for indicating or selecting of ships’ items; compartments, physical planesand reference planes, but it is also possible to assign a function to it, which is carried out later when such ships’item has been indicated. When such a function (for example function [Plane], subfunction [Edit], with which dataof physical planes can be modified) has been activated, it is shown in the second block of the bottom status row.When the box displays ‘Select’, this means that the left mouse button is in the default position: select. What isexactly selected depends on the selection modus, which can have four positions:

AutoThis is the most extensive position; herewith the nearest item is selected, which may be a subcompartment,physical plane or reference plane.

SubcompartmentsWith which only subcompartments are selected (see note below).

PlanesWith ‘Planes’ only physical planes are selected.

Reference planesOnly reference planes are selected herewith.

Attention

When selecting subcompartments there is still a difference between subcompartments of the type ‘spacegenerated between planes’ and that of the type ‘with coordinates’. With the first type the subcompartment ischosen, with the second the entire compartment. Indeed, when a compartment consists of subcompartmentsof both types, then both are selected (i.e. shown shadedly). That looks weird, but is a logical consequenceof the chosen lay-out. One could argue in favour of uniformity in this field, but it should be considered thanthat some program functions imply a different choice, for example when choosing from the compartment tree(where one can select a subcompartment as well as a compartment) or the graphic dragging (for which oneactually has to indicate a subcompartment, see paragraph 10.3.3.3.12 on page 118, Drag). Besides, one’s tastecan also play a role, for example that it is graphically ‘prettier’ when a compartment is shown in its entirety(with the negative subcompartments also graphically deducted from the compartment, like at present). We atSARC have not yet decided at this moment which is most practical in all cases, we would first like to gainmore experience with the present implementation.

10.3.2.3 How long stays a function assigned to a mouse button?

This is no principal matter, it is a choice, Newlay can be made thus that it is assigned once, or permanently, orotherwise, in principle this does not matter. But users may have different wishes, and that’s why that can be set, insection 10.5.4 on page 129, general program configurations is explained how this works. There are three options:

NeverThen the mouse function always remains attached to the left button (until one chooses another).

Cancel structural commands after useWith this setting, commands that cause an important modification in the arrangement structure (such asadding and removing of planes) are removed as mouse function after single use. This prevents that planesor compartments are unwantedly added or removed in the event of fast clicking.

Cancel all commands after use.Herewith any function is removed as mouse function after single use, and therefore one has to assign anycommand to the mouse button repeatedly. Apart from that, at all times the user can detach the functionfrom the mouse button with the key <F12>

10.3.2.4 Operation in the 3D subwindows

Figure 10.2: Three-dimensional sub window.

At the left side in each three-dimensional subwindow is a number of buttons that are specifically related to thatsubwindow:

• Rotate: assigns the rotation function to the right mouse button. This is the standard.

• Zoom+ and Zoom-: zoom in and out. It is also possible to zoom dynamically with the mouse wheel.

• Extend: zoom to full-screen.

• Pan: assigns the dragging function to the right mouse button. By pressing the mouse wheel button perma-nently one can also drag without using this function.

• Clip: one can clip the 3D subwindow i.e that one can define a hexagonal box, where only the contents ofthat box is visible. With this clip function one switches the clipping on and off.

• Setclip: six clip boundaries can be set with this function. When this function is active, the hexagonal boxappears, a bit transparent, and by standing on one side and by pressing the right mouse button permanentlyone can drag that side.

When the right mouse button is pressed permanently, the [rotate] or [pan] function is carried out, depending onwhat has been set. By pressing the right mouse button shortly, a popup menu appears with which one can carryout non-modelling operations witih the ship subdivision model. These are available in four groups:

• [View]: herewith one can carry out the same operations as with the buttons at the left side, which have beendiscussed above. Besides, there is still the function [(in)visible], with which one can set which individualparts of a ship are (in)visible.

• [Edit]: with this function the position and intensity of external light sources can be set. One can also changethe colors (as well as reflection characteristics and transparency); when the mouse pointer is standing ona part of a ship then its color can be adjusted; when the pointer is standing on nothing at all, then thebackground color is adjusted.

• [File]: with this function one can save the present picture to file (in VRML or BMP format), print with theprinter or copy to clipboard. This function only regards the picture, it has nothing to do with the file savingof Newlay.

• [Setup] consists of two rarely used setups: With ‘select closest’ one can enter whether, when several objectshave been indicated with the mouse pointer, the closest has to be taken, or that all indicated objects arepresented to the user in a popup box, after which one can choose from that. The second option is called‘auto apply’, when this has been switched on color changes are processed directly, if not, only when oneleaves the setup box. This option seems a bit meaningless, but has once been introduced to get round aWindows bug.

10.3.2.5 Shortcut keys

In order to speed up work it can be practical to use shortcut keys. The following are available for this:

• In the tree view windows the <Insert> and <Delete> keys for resp. adding or removing of a(sub)compartment, reference plane or physical plane. After <Delete> at (sub)compartment, the(sub)compartment can be sticked in again (possibly at another position), so this button rather has themeaning of ‘cutting’ than of ‘removing’.

• In the tree view windows the <Home>, <End>, <Page Up> and <Page Down> keys in order to jump resp.to the top of the list, to its bottom, to the upper line of the window and to the lower line.

• In the tree view windows the <F2> to alter the name.

• <F12> to detach a function from left mouse button (see section 10.3.2.3 on page 112, How long stays afunction assigned to a mouse button?).

• As side-effect of Windows, any function in the upper bar can be called with the key combination<Alt><function letter>.

• In due course, other <F> function keys will be assigned to the functions that are mostly used.

10.3.2.6 The shape of a plane (the green dots)

Figure 10.3: Defining the shape of a physical plane with the green dots.

An important function of Newlay is the addition of planes. These not necessarily need to extend over the entireship, but can also be in a part of it. This shape is entered by means of the plane contour, which is controlled bythe ‘green dots’, as they are called in the manual. Its background is discussed here in more detail. This all takesplace in a popup window as displayed in the above figure, where you can see that the shape of the plane has beenrecorded with only three green dots.

What is shown there is the cross-section of the plane, with the chosen contour indicated in purple (at least,that is the default color, the user himself can choose another color at the Setup menu, see also section 10.5.4 onpage 129, general program configurations). The contour can stop at the intersection with other planes, so one doesnot enter coordinates here, one chooses to which other, already present, planes the contour extends. A topological


definition has been obtained in that manner, from which results, for example, that when the position of anotherplane changes, this contour also changes. The main idea here is that a user can enter the desired contour byindicating points of these other planes, through which that contour has to go. By the way, one need not indicate allpoints, also in the event of only a few points the program itself chooses the most evident contour, see the examplefrom the figure where the contour has been recorded with only four indicated points (the green/yellow dots). Moreprecisely, indicating occurs as follows:

• When one stands with the mouse pointer on or near a point, then the dot can be switched on or off with theleft mouse button as ‘wanted’ (green/yellow).

• When one stands with the mouse pointer near a connecting line between two points, then that piece of linecan be switched on or off with the left mouse button as ‘wanted’ (green/yellow).

• When one stands with the mouse pointer on or near a point, then the dot can be switched on or off with theright mouse button as ‘unwanted’ (red).

• Idem for unwanted connecting lines (red).

In the event of a new plane, one can directly start to switch on/off. In the event of an already existing plane,there is protection against accidental modification, which is called the ‘contour modus’. That contour modus isinitially ‘off’ (that is also reported in the status line at the bottom of the window) so nothing can be changed. Withmenu option [Setup], suboptie [Contourmodus] one can switch this on. Further options from the upper bar menuare:

• Undo, undo the changes, and put the original contour back.

• Abort, abort this action and stop with this contour changing window.

• Continue, stop with this contour changing window and process the change in the ship’s model. When onepresses on the right upper cross of the window then it is clear that the user wants to stop with this window,but it is not clear whether the changes have to be included in the ship’s model. When there actually arechanges, that question is asked again.

10.3.3 GUI functions

The purpose and the operation of various functions to be chosen from the upper bar are discussed below. There aretwo types of functions, namely those with a direct effect (since nothing else has to be indicated) and those that areassigned to the left mouse button, because something has to be indicated later on to which this function is applied.At any function below is mentioned which type it is.

10.3.3.1 Setup

10.3.3.1.1 Clear action

The action that is attached to the left mouse button at that moment is removed from it with this. Type of function:direct.

10.3.3.1.2 Selection mode

Herewith one can choose one of the four selection modi, as explained in section 10.3.2.2 on page 112, Left mousebutton and modus.

10.3.3.1.3 Setup

Herewith one calls up the menu with program settings, which is discussed in more detail in section 10.5.4 onpage 129, general program configurations.

10.3.3.1.4 Colors

Herewith one calls up the menu with which the colors of the various ships’ components can be set. This is a limitedversion of a more general menu for setting ships’ components, which is discussed in more detail in section 10.5.5on page 130, Names and color per part category.



10.3.3.1.5 Save

With this option the subdivision model is saved to file. The model is regularly saved between times, by the way,so as little work as possible gets lost in the event of a failure. One can also choose to save the model while oneis working in the GUI at fixed times, which can be defined at the program configurations, see section 10.5.4 onpage 129, general program configurations.

10.3.3.2 View

First of all, one can indicate here which things you would like to be presented in the GUI. You may select from:

• Planes and spaces, these are the physical planes and, solely for the 2D windows, the spaces generated inbetween. When these have been made invisible, then the physical planes tree view window also disappears,because this has become useless. Likewise, functions related to physical planes cannot be activated then.

• Reference planes, the reference planes. When these have been made invisible, then the reference planes treeview window also disappears, and functions related to reference planes cannot be activated.

• Hull, the hull lines (or planes), only applies to the 3D window.

• Compartments arisen between planes, these are, solely for the 3D window, the compartments generatedbetween the physical planes.

• Other compartments, for the 2D window as well as the 3D window these are the other compartments (so forthose of the type ‘space generated between planes’ and ‘external PIAS ship shape’).

Through the last menu option one may choose the schedule in which the compartments are colored; thepossibilities are:

• Uniform, where all compartments get the same color. There may be a difference in color after specificprogram actions, such as in the event of a just cut or generated compartment (these colors can be set atsection 10.5.4 on page 129, general program configurations).

• Individual, where any compartment gets its own coulor (automatically determined by the program).

• Per weight group, where a compartment is colored in conformity with the color that applies for the weightgroup assigned to the compartment. These colors can be set at section 10.5.6 on page 131, Define weightgroups.

• Compartment Overlap, here the program conducts an overlap test between compartments, where one candeduce from the color whether the compartments have been defined uniquely and non-overlapping, as itshould be:

– Green: good.

– Background color: this piece of a ship is not covered by a compartment, the compartment definition istherefore not complete. - Red: Several compartments overlap here.

10.3.3.3 Compartment

These menu options have been subdivided in two groups, those above the horizontal dividing line regard thecompartments tree view, those under the line are applicable in the graphical windows. We start with the firstgroup:

10.3.3.3.1 Compartments Tree view

The compartment tree contains the compartments in the main branches, and under each compartment the subcom-partments. With this command one can collapse and expand all branches at once. Apart from that, one can ofcourse also collapse or expand an individual branch with the + for each compartment. Type of function: direct.


10.3.3.3.2 Sort

With this command the compartments are sorted in the tree view. This is possible on two criteria, namely oncompartment name, and on location (where the compartments are sorted in length, breadth and height direction).The sorting can be undone with Undo. Type of function: direct.

10.3.3.3.3 Newcompart

Herewith a new, and empty, compartment is added in the tree, under the compartment that was selected at thatmoment. Type of function: direct.

10.3.3.3.4 NewSubcompart

Herewith a new subcompartment is added under the compartment that was selected at that moment. The subcom-partment only has a default shape and type, which has no meaning, nor any connection with something else. Typeof function: direct.

10.3.3.3.5 Cut

Cut a compartment or subcompartment. Type of function: direct. By the way, the <Delete> key does exactly thesame.

10.3.3.3.6 Paste

Paste a compartment or subcompartment. That object is then placed after the then selected compartment orsubcompartment. Type of function: direct.

10.3.3.3.7 Undocut

Undoes the cutting of a (sub)compartment. Type of function: direct.

10.3.3.3.8 Remove eMpty

Removes all empty compartments (those compartments that have no subcompartments). This function can bepractically used after a number of compartments no longer has subcompartments after dragging (graphically, or inthe compartment tree). Those can easily be removed in this manner. Type of function: direct.

10.3.3.3.9 Edit

This is the first function of the list that is applicable in the graphical windows, and therefore not in the treeview. With this function one enters the detail window of a compartment, which is discussed in more detail insection 10.4.1 on page 120, Compartment definition window. Type of function: assign to left mouse button.

10.3.3.3.10 Assign

Compartments and spaces as they are generated between planes have been linked. This link is as much as possiblemaintained, so when, for example, a new plane is added then additional compartments will be generated for that,the name and other features of which can be adjusted later on by the user. But if one has removed a compartmentwith, for example, [Cut] or the <Delete> key the space in question still exists, but it is no longer linked to acompartment. With this function, [Assign], a new compartment is added that is linked to the space. That newcompartment still has default parameters, such as name and specific gravity, but these can simply be changedlater on. Type of function: assign to left mouse button, because the space to which a new compartment must beassigned has to be indicated afterwards in one of the orthogonal cross-sections.

10.3.3.3.11 Swap

When a plane is added that runs through a subcompartment, that subcompartment is divided in two parts, whilethe features of the original subcompartment are assigned to one space, and a new subcompartment is made for thesecond space, the features of which have to be filled in in more detail (except for its shape, of course). This choiceis arbitrary, and it might very well be the intention of the designer that the original subcompartment is assigned tothat second space. When this is the case, one can turn this assignment with this function, [Swap], again (and alsoturn it back again when one is mistaken). Type of function: left mouse button, since the space to be swapped stillhas to be indicated.


10.3.3.3.12 Drag

Subcompartments are hanging under compartments, and its organisation is completely up to the user. Particularlyin the event of adding new planes, new spaces are made which are each assigned to a new subcompartment thatis hanging under a new compartment. When one wants to change that subdivision, one can do that by means ofdragging in the compartment tree view window. With this function, [Drag], one can do exactly the same in oneof the 2D windows. So one can indicate a subcompartment, keep on pressing the mouse button, and drag theobject to another subcompartment. When one releases the mouse button, the subcompartment is replaced fromthe original to the newly indicated compartment, but this needs to be acknowledged. Empty compartments (i.e.compartments that have no subcompartments) can be generated in this manner, which is no problem in itself, butfor overview purposes it may be practical to remove these, either manually, or with the [Remove eMpty] function,see paragraph 10.3.3.3.8 on the previous page, Remove eMpty.

10.3.3.4 Refplane

Here the menu options above the horizontal dividing line also apply to the tree view, and those under the line tothe graphical windows. For the time being, the first group consists of only one function:

10.3.3.4.1 Sort

10.3.3.4.2 New

A new reference plane is added herewith. An input screen appears where one can put in the various data, seesection 10.5.1.1 on page 127, Popup menu plane orientation for more details. Type of function: direct.

10.3.3.4.3 Remove

With this function a reference plane is removed. Type of function: left mouse button, because the reference planeto be removed still has to be indicated.

10.3.3.4.4 Edit

The characteristics of a reference plane can be changed with this function, see section 10.5.1.1 on page 127,Popup menu plane orientation for the details. Type of function: left mouse button, because the reference plane tobe changed still has to be indicated.

10.3.3.5 Plane

Here the menu options above the horizontal dividing line also apply to the tree view, and those under the line tothe graphical windows. For the time being, the first group consists of only one function:

10.3.3.5.1 Sort

With this command the compartments in the tree view are sorted. This can be done on four criteria, namely onname, position, type and abbreviation. The sorting can be undone again with Undo. Type of function: direct.

10.3.3.5.2 Draw

With this function one draws a plane interactively. The operation is as follows:

• Choose this function.

• Go to the orthogonal view where the plane must be perpendicular to.

• Go to an endpoint of the plane and press the left mouse button. There will appear a cross-hair.

• Go to the other endpoint, and press the left mouse button again. There will appear a second cross-hair, witha connecting line.

• The bulkhead will be generated perpendicular to the view, through that line.

• In general, the line will not fall in an orthogonal plane accurately, whereas that was perhaps intended. That’swhy the program offers the opportunity of fine-tuning. There one can choose from:


10.4 Compartment list, calculation of tank tables etc. 119

– Consider the bulkhead to be orthogonal (through the mean location of the line)

– Idem, but with the possibility to adjust the location exactly, by typing a size.

– As drawn (possibly angled).

• Afterwards appears a pop-up window with the ‘green dots’ (see section 10.3.2.6 on page 114, The shape ofa plane (the green dots)) so positioned that an as reasonable as possible part of the line is covered by thebulkhead. Is this not satisfactory, then one can still adjust the level of extension of the bulkhead by meansof the yellow dots. Type of function: left mouse button, because the location and direction of the plane haveto be entered later on by means of drawing.

10.3.3.5.3 New

With this function one adds a plane that extends over the entire ship (from stern to bow, or from bottom to top) atthe beginning. Afterwards can be indicated through the ‘green dots’ (see section 10.3.2.6 on page 114, The shapeof a plane (the green dots)) that the plane extends over a more limited part. Type of function: direct.

10.3.3.5.4 Insert

With this function one adds a plane in one indicated compartment. Afterwards, one can still indicate through the‘green dots’ that the plane extends over a larger part. Type of function: left mouse button, because the compartmentwhere the plane will appear has to be indicated later on.

10.3.3.5.5 Remove

A plane is removed with this function. After the removal of the plane, excess subcompartments may remain.These are removed according to the order of the (sub)compartment list, i.e. when several subcompartments of thetype ‘space generated between planes’ refer to the same space, then the first ones are removed and the last of allremains. Type of function: left mouse button, because the plane to be removed has to be indicated later on.

10.3.3.5.6 Edit

The features of a physical plane can be changed with this function, see section 10.5.1.1 on page 127, Popup menuplane orientation for details. Type of function: left mouse button, because the plane to be changed still has to beindicated.

10.3.3.5.7 Geometry

With this function the contour (and therefore the shape) of a plane is changed. Type of function: left mouse button,because the plane to be change still has to be indicated. After having indicated the plane, a window pops up withthe shape of the plane, where one can change the contour by means of the ‘green dots’ (see section 10.3.2.6 onpage 114, The shape of a plane (the green dots)).

10.3.3.5.8 Copy

Herewith one can copy a plane. Type of function: left mouse button, because the plane to be copied still has to beindicated. The operation is:

• Choose this function.

• Point at the plane to be copied.

• A pop-up window of the copied plane appears, already filled with the copied parameters. Change the nameand position in that window (NB the orientation (position of the plane) cannot be changed, so one is notable to copy a transverse bulkhead to a deck).

• Press the OK button, and the copied plane is added to the model.

10.4 Compartment list, calculation of tank tables etc.

A list of compartments turns up here, with five columns, namely:

• Selected: whether the compartment has been selected for further actions, like calculations or output.


• Name: the unique name of the compartment.

• Abbreviation, of maximally eight characters.

• Convertible. A compartment can be ‘convertible’, see paragraph 10.4.1.2.4 on page 123, Convertible for anexplanation of this concept. In this column one can enter the ‘convertibility’ of all subcompartments of thecompartment.

• Weight group: to which weight group the volume of the compartment belongs. The purpose of weightgroups and its definition is discussed in section 10.5.6 on page 131, Define weight groups.

The upper bar of this list contains, apart from the usual menu options, a number of specific menu options:

• [Manage], with the following sub-options

– [Copy] and [Paste] will be obvious.

– [Paste Link], see the explanation at paragraph 10.4.1.1.2 on the facing page, Subcompartment functions.

– [Sort], herewith the compartments can be sorted according to column (i.e. in the order of the data ofthe column on which the text cursor is standing), to position and to time of definition. The selectioncan be undone again with [Undo].

• [Column], with which one can convert the characteristic of an entire column, namely the column where thetext cursor is standing on, with one strike, for example, all compartments from selected to non-selected.

• [Tables], with which one can calculate and print tank tables, see section 10.4.2 on page 126, Calculate andprint tank tables.

With <Enter> one enters the compartment definition screen, which will be discussed later on.

10.4.1 Compartment definition window

Figure 10.4: Tank definition window.

10.4.1.1 Design of the compartment definition window

The compartment definition window consists of the following items:

• Top left a list of compartment characteristics, such as name or sounding pipe data. These are explained indetail in section 10.4.1.2 on page 123, Compartment data.

• Bottom left a 3D view of the compartment. In this window one can call up a number of functions withthe right mouse button as they have been discussed at section 10.3.2.4 on page 113, Operation in the 3Dsubwindows. By the way, mouse wheel is zooming in-out.

• Left of centre an unfoldable list of compartments, from which one can choose another compartment (onecan also type a name here, but nothing happens then). Choosing the previous and next compartment canalso be done with the two buttons at the right of this list.

• At the right three subscreens related to subcompartments, and which have the same purpose as the threesubwindows discussed above.

• At the bottom a status row, with explanations and/or sizes related to the cell where the text cursor is standingon.

Changing between compartments and subcompartments can be done through indication with the mousepointer, but also with the <Tab> key. Subsequently, there is still a number of functions to be called up in theupper bar, which are discussed below. The upper bar also consists of the + and - functions, with which one canjump to the next or previous compartment (when the text cursor is standing on the left window) or subcompartment(when the textcursor is standing on the right window). These functions have been included so one can quickly gothrough the (sub)compartments with <Alt><+> and <Alt><->.

10.4.1.1.1 Compartment functions

Adding and removing will be obvious; With [Insert] a compartment is added that is included in the list of compart-ments before the present compartment, and with [New] behind it. [Copy] copies the compartment data, including allsubcompartments to an internal clipboard. With [Paste] the compartment data, including all subcompartments, arecopied from that internal clipboard to the present compartment. All existing compartment data (including subcom-partments) are transcribed thereby. The difference between [paste] and [Paste Link] is explained in the followingparagraph.

10.4.1.1.2 Subcompartment functions

The functions [Insert] through [Remove] are entirely analogous to those discussed at the compartments, we refer tothe previous paragraph. The [Paste Link] is related to references of subcompartments, as explained in section 10.1.4on page 109, Links to subcompartments. With [Paste] the subcompartment data are copied to the present compart-ment, with [paste Link] a reference is made from this subcompartment to the shape of the copied subcompartment.

10.4.1.1.3 Coordinates functions

These functions are related to a subcompartment of the type ‘with coordinates’. Such a type is always recordedwith a back and front limit, and in each of it N points that are recording the horizontal and vertical subcompartmentboundary. In general, this is a flexible definition, enabling considerable freedom of shape, but since the major partof the subcompartments does not need this flexibility, a number of subtypes has been defined in order to increaseuserfriendliness:

Eenvoudig blokEen ‘eenvoudig blok’ is een beperkte invulling van de algemene subcompartimentsdefinitie, nl. met rechtehorizontale en verticale grenzen. Dit type kan worden vastgelegd met zes getallen (achter, voor, binnen,buiten, boven en onder).

Vier langsribbenDit is een iets uitgebreidere invulling, waarbij N=4, maar de boven- en zijbegrenzingen niet per se zuiverhorizontal of verticaal hoeven te lopen. Dit is de vorm zoals die ook gebruikt werd in de voorloper vanNewlay, Compart.

Anders dan vier langsribbenDit type is nog uitgebreider, hier is N<>4, en kunnen dus drie-, vijf- of meerzijdige subcompartimentenworden vastgelegd. Een voorbeeld van hoe het subcompartimentsdefinitiescherm er uitziet voor eenvijfzijdig compartiment is hieronder weergegeven:

Simple blockA ‘simple block’ is a limited interpretation of the general subcompartment definition, namely with straighthorizontal and vertical boundaries. This type can be recorded with six numbers (aft, fore, inside, outside,upper and bottom).

Four longitudinal ribsThis is a slightly extended interpretation, where N=4, but the upper and lateral boundaries need not neces-sarily run purely horizontally or vertically. This is the shape as it was also used in the precursor of Newlay,Compart.

Other than four longitudinal ribsThis type is even more extensive, here N<>4, and therefore three-sided, five-sided or multilateral sub-compartments can be recorded. An example of a subcompartment definition window for a five-sidedcompartment is given below:

Most of the [Coordinates] are related to this last variety; in order to change N, one must be able to add orremove rows, and the first three functions ( [Insertrow], [Newrow] and [removerow]) are meant for that. Because mostsubcompartments are prismatic (i.e. that the aft and front sizes are equal), for practical purposes there is a

{Copyaft} function, with which all sizes of the aft side are copied to the front side.

10.4.1.1.4 View functions

Without a special setting, all subcompartments of a compartment are drawn interchangeably in the left bottomsubwindow, irrespective whether they are positive or negative. Mutual connections of two (positive) compartmentsare drawn then, although one could argue that they do not exist in a physical sense, and could therefore be omitted.With the [visually composed] function active subcompartments are actually composed graphically, so that theyrender a more realistic image.

Attention

At this ‘visually composing’ of subcompartments, these are neatly cut off when they overlap. The shape ofnegative subcompartments is also deducted from those of the positive ones. This offers a good insight, but doremember that the calculation is based on the ‘bare’ subcompartment shape, so overlappings are calculateddouble, and a too large negative subcompartment may result in a negative compartment volume.


When the [Surfacemodel] function has been activeated, the (sub)compartments are not drawn as wire model (onframes), but as surface model. All this on the condition that either a surface model of the hull is available (T-RI file, module Config option 1.5, see section 5.1.1 on page 24, General setup for stability calculations) or the(sub)compartment is not at all cut through the hull. If one visualizes a (sub)compartment with a surface in thismanner, one can also switch on the [Transparent] function, with which the surfaces become partially transparent,so that also the sounding pipe remains visible. That renders such images:

10.4.1.1.5 Output functions

Export functions of the compartment will be discussed here in due time.

10.4.1.2 Compartment data

10.4.1.2.1 Compartment

The (unique) name of the compartment.

10.4.1.2.2 Selected

Indicates whether this compartment has been selected for further actions, such as calculations and output.

10.4.1.2.3 Second name and abbreviation

These are supportive names that can be included in some output for cosmetic or explanational purposes. Forexample, the second name at tank tables, and the abbreviation, of maximally eight digits, at the tank plan (sincetoo long names will soon mix up there through several tanks).

10.4.1.2.4 Convertible

Here one can indicate whether a subcompartment at the implementation of option 6.1 (see section 10.8.1 onpage 137, Generate physical planes from the totality of "convertible" subcompartments) must be included in the au-tomatic conversion of the type ‘with coordinates’ to ‘space generated between planes’. Here are four possibilities:

Automatically at conversionAt the conversion is firstly considered whether the compartment overlaps another one. If so, it will not beconverted; if not, it will be converted.

Non-convertibleWill be obvious

Is convertibleIdem

Define per subcompartmentWhich is used when it cannot be recorded for the compartment as a whole whether it must be converted, butthis has to be defined at the more detailed level of subcompartments, as described in paragraph 10.4.1.3.5on page 125, Convertible.


10.4.1.2.5 Design S.W.

Here one can enter the specific weight (in ton/cubic) of the substance for which this compartment and/or this tankis intended. This value is used as default at loading conditions. When such a value is not known or desired, onemay also opt for ‘non-defining’, then there is no default.

10.4.1.2.6 Weight group

Indicates to which weight group the volume of the compartment belongs. The purpose of weight groups and itsdefining has been discussed in section 10.5.6 on page 131, Define weight groups.

10.4.1.2.7 Sounding pipe

Two sounding pipes per compartment can be defined. Each of them takes up one row, where can be defined:

• The name of the pipe. These are called standard ‘sounding pipe 1’ and ‘sounding pipe 2’, but these namescan be modified.

• At [enter] a window pops up in which one can define the sizes of the pipe. This up to a maximum of 50, sothat also curved pipes can be properly modelled. By the way, these sizes can also be referred (via <Enter>)to the reference planes, which might be useful in the event of future design modifications.

• With ‘selected/deselected’ in the right column one indicates whether this pipe has been selected for thebenefit of tank tables.

10.4.1.2.8 Special points / openings

Characteristics can be defined here of specific items that belong to the compartment. There are four predefinedtypes of such items:

Open openingThis is an open opening to the outside, which is connected with the compartment, for example, an unpro-tected vent.

Weathertight openingAn opening to the outside which is connected with this compartment and protected such that it can be con-sidered to be weathertight. Some authorities consider a vent cap to be sufficient protection to that end,others not.

Alarm sensorIn order to be able to process its effect in tank tables and maximum tank filling.

Pressure sensorIts location is important for the calculation of pressure tables (i.e. the tables that indicate which tank fillingbelongs to a specific sensor pressure), and in order to be able to determine the corresponding volume atloading conditions and/or loading software at a known sensor pressure.

At [enter] a window pops up in which one can define:

• Length, breadth and height coordinates of the special point.

• The type of point, and the name.

• Whether the point has been selected is defined in the last column. Only selected points result in an action.When a point has not been selected, it is just as if it does not exist at all. So selection is intended to ’throwaway’ something as it were, while it can be restored later on.

Apart from that, outward openings are traditionally defined in PIAS in a separate list, managed by the moduleHulldef. This list remains forever, because openings can also be defined there that are not connected with a specificcompartment, or other types of points, such as those of the boundary line. In order to prevent inconsistenciesNewlay completes this list again and again with (selected) openings of compartiments, but marks them such thatthey cannot be modified or removed in Hulldef.


10.4.1.2.9 Oil outflow parameters

• Type of tank for the benefit of outflow calculations: for the benefit of probabilistic outflow calculations (seeOutflow, Chapter 225) it must be known wheter a specific compartment is a fuel oil tank or a cargo oil tank(at least, within the meaning of the regulations involved). That can be defined here.

• Tank adjacent to bottom: for that same outflow calculation it may be important whether a tank borders atthe bottom on the plane, or on a non-oil tank. That can be defined here.

• Overpressure as a result of inert gas system: cargo oil tanks can be provided with inert gas systems. If suchis the case, then it is of importance for the outflow calculations to define its overpressure here (in kiloPascal).

10.4.1.2.10 Uniform subcompartment sides

One action can record the side for all subcompartments here, see paragraph 10.4.1.3.6 on the next page, Side forthe options.

10.4.1.2.11 Uniform permeabilities

Permeabilities or space types can be defined here for all subcompartments in one action. See paragraph 10.4.1.3.2on this page, Permeabilities for further merits.

10.4.1.3 Subcompartment data

10.4.1.3.1 Subcompartment

The name of the subcompartment, which has to be unique within the compartment.

10.4.1.3.2 Permeabilities

There are two permeabilities, namely the permeability where is calculated at the tank volume calculation, and theone where is calculated at the damage calculation. Physically, such a distinction can of course not be maintained,but naval architectural practice has shown that for tank volume calculations often a permeability of 0.98 to 0.995is used, while the rules for damage calculations often prescribe a value of 0.95. The calculation of the occurringgrain moments (module Grainmom, Chapter 270) uses the ‘permeability as tank’. The permeability has beendefined as the total volume, taking into account construction parts divided by the total volume without taking intoaccount construction parts, and therefore as a rule has a value between 0 and 1.

Some requirements, in particular the probabilistic damage stability SOLAS 2009, use a permeability thatvaries with the draft, and with the type of space. So one can choose at the option ‘type of space prob.damagestab. SOLAS2009’ from the types of spaces of SOLAS. Such ‘type of space’ makes the definition of the ‘damagepermeability’ of course superfluous.

Apart from that, it will only occur seldomly that permeabilities or types of spaces differ among subcom-partments of the same compartment. When they are all equal, it is more practical to define these data at thecompartment, since the permeabilities for all subcompartments are recorded then by one action.

10.4.1.3.3 Shape type

The type of subcompartment. There are three types, as introduced in section 10.1.1 on page 107, Definitions,namely ‘with coordinates’, ‘space generated between planes’ and ‘external PIAS hullform’.

10.4.1.3.4 Sign

Positive or negative, resp. whether this subcompartment has to be added to the subcompartment or whether it hasto be deducted from it. This sign can not be filled in at subcompartments of the type ‘space generated betweenplanes’, since they are always positive.

10.4.1.3.5 Convertible

One can indicate here whether a subcompartment at the implementation of option 6.1 (see section 10.8.1 onpage 137, Generate physical planes from the totality of "convertible" subcompartments) must be included in theautomatic conversion of the type ‘with coordinates’ to ‘space generated between planes’. This row only appearswhen one has entered at the compartiment at the ‘convertibility’ that this can be set per subcompartment (seeparagraph 10.4.1.2.4 on page 123, Convertible).



10.4.1.3.6 Side

SBAn asymmetrical subcompartment that is only at SB.

PSAn asymmetrical subcompartment that is only at PS.

DoubleA symmetrical subcompartment of which only the SB half has been defined, which is reflected to PS.

According to coordinatesWhere the subcompartment is simply recorded by its coordinates, without specific symmetry assumptions.According to PIAS convention, the breadth size is positive at SB, at PS negative.

10.4.1.3.7 Shape definition external subcompartments

File name and length, breadth and height shift, where resp. the file name of the PIAS shape definition (asrecorded with Hulldef or Fairway) and the shift of the origin of that definition to its position of this subcompartmentare defined.

10.4.1.3.8 Shape complexity

At a subcompartment of the type ‘with coordinates’ one can define here whether the subcompartment is a simpleblock, that can be recorded with six digits, or has a slightly more complex shape, for which more digits arerequired. One can choose here from the three types mentioned at paragraph 10.4.1.1.3 on page 121, Coordinatesfunctions.

Attention

When a subcompartment shape is of the type ‘space generated between planes’ then the indication ‘cannotbe displayed in coordinates’ can occur. That does not mean that the shape is wrong or useless. Such asubcompartment shape is entirely acceptable, but it only cannot be displayed with longitudinal ribs that runfrom aft to front. It would be possible to further split up the shape so that displayable shapes are generated,but that increases the number of subcompartments, so it was opted for not to do that.

10.4.1.3.9 Subcompartment coordinates

The final part of the subcomcompartment definition window consists of the coordinates, so the aft border, foreborder and the other breadth and height borders. These coordinates are only shown at the types ‘with coordinates’and ‘space generated between planes’. At the last type they are only for information purposes, and they cantherefore not be changed (the borders are then after all entirely determined by the physical planes).

10.4.2 Calculate and print tank tables

These functions have not been implemented in Newlay yet, and still have to be carried out with Compart for thetime being. See also section 10.10.1 on page 138, Compartment files.

10.5 Other lists, and program configurations

3. Lists and program configurations

1. List of physical planes

2. List of reference planes

3. Compartment tree

4. general program configurations

5. Names and color per part category

6. Define weight groups

7. Notes and remarks


10.5 Other lists, and program configurations 127

10.5.1 List of physical planes

Here appears a list of physical planes, with five columns, namely:

• Name: the name of the plane.

• Abs.position: the position of the plane, in metres from ALL, HS or basis.

• Rel.position: the position of the plane in relation to a reference plane, at least, when the plane has beenrelatively defined.

• Type of plane: longitudinal plane, transverse plane, horizontal plane or angled plane.

• Abbreviation, of maximally eight digits.

In the upper bar of this list is, apart from the usual menu options, a number of specific menu options:

• When adding a new plane, one directly enters the popup menu of section 10.5.1.1 on this page, Popup menuplane orientation.

• [Geometry], with which one can change the shape of the plane. Directions are described at section 10.3.2.6on page 114, The shape of a plane (the green dots).

• [Sort], with which one can sort the planes by columns, i.e. in the order of the data of the column where thetext cursor is. This sorting can also be undone again with [Undo].

In all columns, except for the fourth one, one can directly type values. With <Enter> one enters a popup menuwith data of the plane, and when one at the absolute or relative position presses on <Enter>, one enters the planedefinition menu that is decribed hereunder.

10.5.1.1 Popup menu plane orientation

This menu is used to define the orientation, which is the bearing and position, of a plane. Not only of a physicalplane, but also of a reference plane. Here one can fill in:

• The position in metres of the plane.

• The position in frames (when it regards a transverse bulkhead or transverse plane).

• Possibly the relative position, which is the position in relation to a reference plane.

• When the plane has been entered referrally, then the reference plan in question can be chosen in suchexpendable row, either by its abbreviation (left field) or by its entire name (right field).

• As alternative for browsing through the reference planes list with those openklapbare rows the function[Find] can be used. For that one types the plane abbreviation in the left row (or in the right one its entirename) and presses the [Find] button.

Furthermore, this window consists of two functions in the upper bar:


• [Edit refvlak], to jump to the reference plane menu, in order to add or adjust a reference plane.

• [anGled] to change an orthogonal bulkhead or plane into an angled plane. See section 10.5.1.2 on this page,Angled planes for more details. This function is not always available though. For example, when onechanges a reference plane this is lacking, since one would be able then to convert a reference plane, forexample, from transverse to angled, as a result of which all references of other transverse planes to thisreference plane would be senseless.

• [Help], with which the list of shortcut keys appears that is applicable in this window:

Enter Next input fieldTab Next input fieldShift Tab Previous input fieldCtrl-A Select everything in boxCtrl-Del Remove everything from boxAlt-O OKAlt-C CancelAlt-R RelativeAlt-A AbsoluteAlt-Z Find reference planeAlt-T Transverse bulkhead (Transverse, only

applicable to a new plane)Alt-L Longitudinal plane (only applicable to a

new plane)Alt-D Deck (only applicable to a new plane)

10.5.1.2 Angled planes

Figure 10.5: Definition menu angled plane.

The orientation of an orthogonal plane, that is a transverse plane, longitudinal plane or horizontal plane, is entirelyrecorded with its type and one digit. In order to record an angled plane, however, more data are required. Thereare innumerable manners in which an angled plane can be recorded, but in Newlay has been opted for doing this bymeans of three points in the space, because this is considered most intuitively. Those three points are in a menu,an example of which is given above. This menu essentially includes for any of the tree points a row, with in thecolumns the length, breadth and height coordinates of that point. As a matter of fact, these points are unrelated toany other point of the ship or its general arrangement plan. The last column contains the distance from that pointto the angled plane. For the plane is not directly adjusted to the position of the three points, but for reasons ofsafety it has been chosen that the function [Generate] must be called upon there later on. Other functions that areavailable in the upper bar are:

• Refplane: to let a coordinate of a point refer to a reference plane. However, this provision has not yet beenimplemented.


10.5 Other lists, and program configurations 129

• Shift: shift this point to the plane, along the axis of this point. So, for example, for a height coordinate avertical shift.

• Project: project this point on the angled plane, according to the direction perpendicular to the plane.

• Orthogonal: reshape this plane to an orthogonal plane that is most similar to this angled plane.

• Cancel: leave this menu without saving the modification.

10.5.2 List of reference planes

10.5.3 Compartment tree

With this option there appears a popup box with the same compartment tree view as used in the GUI. Essentially,this tree contains no more information than the regular compartment list of section 10.4 on page 119, Compartmentlist, calculation of tank tables etc., except for that it is shown here per compartiments and subcompartiments inone overview.

10.5.4 general program configurations

Figure 10.6: Program setup.

With this option appears the above popup screen, in which a number of program features and colors can be set:

• The cross-section position of the three orthogonal cross-sections is controlled anyway by clicking in sucha cross-section on the right mouse button, then the position of the other cross-section is equalled to theposition of the cursor at that moment. But apart from this mechanism, one may also opt for adjusting thatcross-section position to a plane or compartment that has been chosen in the compartment tree or planeslist. If you want this, then you have the put the first option on yes.

• Allowance: It is useful when the reference planes are drawn slightly larger than the rest of the ship. Thatextra size, the allowance, can be defined here.

• Threshold volume: at a conversion of a compartment configuration to a plane configuration, negative sub-compartments can be included integrally. This may result, however, in a substantial increase in the numberof used planes, which is not necessarily desired. That’s why one can define a limit value (of volume, incubic metres) here under which negative subcompartments are not included in the conversion to planes,they still exist of course, but simply as subcompartment of the type ‘wih coordinates’.



• Line thickness will be obvious.

• At the time interval one can define per how many minutes the model is saved automatically. That can beuseful in the event of failures, then you still have at least a recent model.

• As explained in section 10.10.1 on page 138, Compartment files it is required for the benefit of subsequentcalculations to convert the compartment data to a format that is compatible with Compart. That is possible,since the user is able to order Newlay that such a file is generated (see section 10.8.5 on page 138, Exportcompartments to PIAS’ pre-2012 format). When one forgets to do this one thinks to be working at such asubsequent calculation with the most recent general arrangement plan, but that is not the case then. That’swhy one can define at the option [generate PIAS compartments when saving] that the compartments alwayshave to be saved in conventional PIAS format too when leaving the program. But do remember that theoriginal PIAS file with compartments is overwritten then.

• For the cancel regime see section 10.3.2.3 on page 112, How long stays a function assigned to a mousebutton?.

• The colors will be obvious. The color of ‘desired contour points’ is for that of the ’green dots’. The ‘justgenerated space color’ and the ‘cut space color’ are only used at a compartment color schedule ‘uniform’(see for that section 10.3.3.2 on page 116, View).

10.5.5 Names and color per part category

Figure 10.7: Names, colors and other part properties.

Herewith one can choose the colors of the various ships’ items. In section 10.5.4 on the preceding page, generalprogram configurations one could also configurate colors, but that was meant for program items, here we aretalking about ships’ items, of which seven features can be defined: - The first column contains the identificationname of a category. This is mentioned here for the purpose of recognition, and cannot be changed anymore.

• In the next two columns one can set the color as it is used in the 3D views, in the second column for a lightbackground, and in the third column for a dark one.

• Subsequently two columns in which one can set the color as it is used in the 2D cross-sections (the orthog-onal cross-sections), also for light and dark backgrounds.

• In the sixth column one can define whether this category must be included in the output of the 3D rendermodel, the production of which is described in section 10.6 on the next page, Threedimensional presentation.

• In the seventh column one defines whether this category must be included in the DXF output of the generalarrangement plan, the production of which is described in section 10.7.6 on page 136, 3D-plan to DXF file.


10.6 Threedimensional presentation 131

• In the eighth column one can define the layer name that is allocated to this category in such a DXF output.When defining the layer name one has to observe the conventions of Autocad, or another recipient CA-D system. Thus a layer name can have, for example, a specific maximum length, or some signs may beforbidden. For the exact nature of these restrictions, you will have to consult the documentation of therecipient system.

10.5.6 Define weight groups

With this option one enters a menu where features of weight groups can be defined. A weight group is a specificcategory of weight, of, for example, a ship or cargo. At the definition of compartments can be defined at thecompartment what the weight group is of the volume for which this compartment is intended, for example drinkingwater or palm oil. Color combination or output of loading conditions can take place per weight group, but realizethat the use of weight groups is voluntary, it is an option you can choose. Because most applications of weightgroups are related to loading conditions, this menu is discussed there in more detail, see section 12.3.3 on page 146,Definition of weight groups.

10.5.7 Notes and remarks

With this option an input screen appears with which one can make separate notes. These notes are saved at thesubdivision plan, and can always be altered later on.

10.6 Threedimensional presentation

Figure 10.8: Rendered view, with surface model of hull.



Figure 10.9: Rendered view, with sectional model of hull, including container slots.

With this option one can produce a three-dimensional rendered view, like in the above figure. In general, thisis identical to the 3D view in the GUI, and naturally these functions are applcable, which are discussed in sec-tion 10.3.2.4 on page 113, Operation in the 3D subwindows. It differs insofar as that in the GUI the functionsmust be called upon through a popup box, which is activated with the right mouse button, while the functions arein the upper bar here, so they are more accessible. When drawing such a rendered view, one has to be aware oftwo issues:

• When the drawing of hull frame lines is switched off, such objects can sometimes actually be drawn. Butthose are the compartment frame lines, to be recognized by the color of the compartment.

• Drawing hull lines and/or planes is only possible when such a model is actually present and when it hasbeen activated in module Config, option 1.5 (Preferred format hullform file).


10.7 Subdivision plan 133

10.7 Subdivision plan

The layout of a two-dimensional subdivision plan can be recorded at this option, two examples of which aredisplayed above. Such a subdivision plan contains the geometric information of the internal geometry, and canbe used as schematic general arrangement plan, tank plan or safety plan. The most obvious application is to havethis subdivision plan serve as ‘primary layer’ for such other drawing, and to draw all additions (like deckhouses,masts, lights, valves) in another layer. When the subdivision changes later on, then only that primary layer needsto be replaced, and all other layers can be re-used. For the benefit of this subdivision plan there are six submenuoptions:


5. Subdivision plan

1. Configuration subdivision plan and DXF export

2. Names and color per part category

3. Subdivision plan layout

4. Subdivision plan preview

5. Subdivision plan to paper or file

6. 3D-plan to DXF file

10.7.1 Configuration subdivision plan and DXF export

• Color of the compartments, where can be defined whether any compartment gets an individual color, whichis allocated per weight group, or that all compartments are drawn with the same color.

• Desired container slot size, where can be defined which of the predefined container slots must be drawn inthe subdivision plan. The slot size is defined in entire feet, for example 20 or 40.

• Subdivision plan with color. Here is defined whether the general arrangement plan is drawn with color ornot.

• Coloring compartments in subdivision plan. Here is indicated whether the compartments that are drawn inthe subdivision plan are also colored. The alternative is that only its circumference is drawn.

• Additional margin framework linesplan on paper (mm). When drawing the general arrangement plan onpaper, the available paper space is used as much as possible. At this option one can, however, define anadditional free space along the paper edge, in millimeters.

• Unit of measure of the 3D DXF file. Here one can define whether the unit of measure of the 3D DXF file ismeter or millimeter.

• 3D DXF file name, here one can type either the desired file name, or (with <Enter>) call upon the Windows-filebrowser to indicate the file name.

• Texts drawing head. A subdivision plan that is printed on paper can contain a drawing head in the right-under corner. Here one can define how many rows this must contain, and which texts must be included.

10.7.2 Names and color per part category

This is exactly the same menu as discussed in section 10.5.5 on page 130, Names and color per part category,which for the sake of convenience also has been incorporated in this menu, in order to be able to quickly adjust aconfiguration.

10.7.3 Subdivision plan layout

The layout of a subdivision plan can be recorded here. It is possible to specify several layouts (maximally 4), sothat, for example, a subdivision plan with several pages can be defined. When one has chosen this submenu thenthere firstly appears a window with those various layouts. There is little to say about this, any layout has a name,one can define which one is selected to be drawn later on, and, finally, with the Copy/Paste mechanism one layoutcan be copied to the other. With <Enter> one enters a window where the details ot that layout in question can bedefined. One can define in that screen which views are included at which position in the drawing of the subdivisionplan. The desired position of a cross-section is defined in meters shift in horizontal and vertical direction. Onemust imagine here that a 2D 1:1 drawing is made, where certain views are shifted horizontally or vertically overa certain distance (in real-size measures). The scale on which is finally drawn depends on the paper sizes, whichare not yet known here, and does therefore play no role yet. Per view one can define the following:

10.7 Subdivision plan 135

• The shift in breadth, in m, of this cross-section on the 2D 1:1 subdivision plan. This shift has no absolutemeaning, but records the relative position of the view relative to other views. It is common practice that oneview has no shift.

• Analogous to the previous row: the shift in height, in m, of this cross-section.

• The view, which may be a top view, side view or front view as desired.

• The number of cross-sections that is drawn in this view. When one wants to change this number, one entersa deeper menu.

• Whether an X-axis must be drawn with grade mark. The alternatives are: no X-axis, plain X-axis, X-axiswith grade mark without legend, X-axis with grade mark and legend in millimeters, X-axis with grade markand legend in meters, X-axis with grade mark and legend in frame number. This last option is only availableat the top and side views.

• Analogous to the previous row: whether a Y-axis must be drawn with grade mark.

• The description, that is the name of this view, which is printed below the view.

As mentioned above, after choosing the fourth menu option, one enters a deeper menu, where details of thewished cross-sections of the view in question can be defined. Per view one can define here:

• The position. At front views in m from All, at top views in m from base and at side views in m from CL,positive for a cross-section at SB side and negative for a cross-section at PS.

• The side. At top views and front views one can define here whether the cross-section is located at one side(PS or SB), or extends over both sides.

• Cross-section/Contour. Here one defines whether it is a real cross-section, thus a cutting, or a total view, orcontour. The following details are applicable here:

– A contour can only be defined for the hull, sounding pipes and special points. It makes no sense forother objects.

– At a contour of the hull many points of it are projected in the view plane, and its envelope is deter-mined. Substantial steps in the contour view can be possibly cut as a result. When this occurs, so beit.

– Sounding pipes and special points can probably best be drawn in ‘contour’, because they are all shownthen. Mostly there is little to see at ‘cross-section’, because the chance that such a pipe or point isexactly in that cross-section is small (although the program uses a certain tolerance around the cross-section).

• Hull. In this column one defines whether the hull must be drawn in the view in question.

• Transverse. Indicates whether transverse bulkheads must be drawn.

• Longitudinal. Indicates whether longitudinal bulkheads must be drawn.

• Deck. Indicates whether horizontal bulkheads (decks) must be drawn.

• Angled. Indicates whether angled bulkheads must be drawn.

• Compart. Indicates whether compartments must be drawn.

• Sounding pipes. Indicates whether sounding pipes of the compartments (see paragraph 10.4.1.2.7 onpage 124, Sounding pipe) must be drawn.

• Sp.point. Indicates whether the special points of the compartiments (such as openings, see para-graph 10.4.1.2.8 on page 124, Special points / openings) must be drawn.

• Contain. Indicates whether the container slots must be drawn. Note: The container slots must be defined inorder to be drawn. That can be done with PIAS module Cntslot.



10.7.4 Subdivision plan preview

With this option the subdivision plan is drawn on the screen. It is intended that this preview option is integrated indue time in the definition options of the subdivision plan, so that definition changes are directly and interactivelymade visible.

10.7.5 Subdivision plan to paper or file

The subdivision plan, that was drawn on the screen at the previous menu option, can be printed by the printer orplotter with this option. When one wants to make a file that contains the subdivision plan, then one can use themechanism where output of PIAS is caught and sent to a file. One can define that at option 1.15 of PIAS’ generalsetup module (see section 5.1.1 on page 24, General setup for stability calculations), and one may choose herefrom three formats:

• Rich Text Format, RTF, to generate a bitmap that, for example, can be read in MS Word.

• Encapsulated PostScript, EPS, to generate a file with vector data. Vectors can be displayed much moresharply than a bitmap.

• Drawing eXchange Format, DXF, to import the general arrangement plan in a CAD or drawing system.With this format one can choose whether the unit of measure is meters or millimeters. The thus generatedDXF file consist of line types of the DXF type ‘polyline’.

10.7.6 3D-plan to DXF file

Also with this option a DXF file is made, but one that contains the complete 3D model. This file has the followingfeatures :

• Lines are of the type ‘DXF polyline’.

• Bulkheads and decks are displayed by means of a closed, but further non-filled contour.

• Possible angled planes, for example of the hull, are first divided in triangles, and subsequently saved aswireframe model.

• Any category, such as hull, decks and 20’ containers, comes in its own layer, of which one can define thename at and colors per item category [Names and colors per item category], see section 10.7.2 on page 134,Names and color per part category.

• Only those elements are included of which at [Names and colors per item category] the column DXF has beenplaced on ‘yes’.

10.8 Conversion, and import and export of subdivision data

6. Conversion and import and export

1. Generate physical planes from the totality of "convertible" subcompartments

2. Overlap test compartments & advice setup on convertibility

3. Import PIAS compartments in pre-2012 format

4. Clean pre-2012 PIAS compartments

5. Export compartments to PIAS’ pre-2012 format

6. Export decks and bulkheads to Rapid Prototyping format (STL)

7. Write XML file

8. Read XML file


10.8 Conversion, and import and export of subdivision data 137

10.8.1 Generate physical planes from the totality of ”convertible” subcompartments

This option does four things. First, an overlapping check is carried out, which is entirely identical to the secondoption in this menu (see section 10.8.2 on this page, Overlap test compartments & advice setup on convertibility),where subcompartments of the type ‘generated between planes’ can be converted to the type ‘with coordinates’. Atthis test is also checked whether subcompartments overlap, and if so, the convertibility of one of the two, namelythe smallest one, is switched off, so it is omitted at the conversion. Subsequently, all physical planes are removed,after which a new collection of physical planes is generated on the basis of the subcompartments of the type ‘withcoordinates’ that mututally tighten exactly those subcompartments. Finally, all those subcompartments are con-verted to the type ‘generated between planes’. It is not compulsory to use all available compartments at this action;through the setting ‘convertible’, which can be defined in the compartment list (see section 10.4 on page 119, Com-partment list, calculation of tank tables etc.), at the compartment definition (see paragraph 10.4.1.2.4 on page 123,Convertible) and the subcompartment definition (see paragraph 10.4.1.3.5 on page 125, Convertible) one canexactly indicate which (sub)compartments are included in this conversion and which ones are not included.

Attention

It is advised to use this conversion option tactfully. It may be tempting to convert a complete ship, with all itscompartments and tanks, to the combination of physical planes and the subcompartment type ‘space generatedbetween planes’, which is possible and allowed, but one may end up with a large amount of physical planes,without any overview, as a result of which it is useless in the end. It is probably wiser to confine oneself atthe conversion to compartments that belong to the main division of the ship. Please consult what has beenwritten at section 10.1.2 on page 108, Use of different types of subcompartments.

10.8.2 Overlap test compartments & advice setup on convertibility

This option is meant to support the generation of physical planes from subcompartments of the type ‘with co-ordinates’ (see section 10.8.1 on the current page, Generate physical planes from the totality of "convertible"subcompartments), since that is only possible with non-overlapping subcompartments. First of all is consideredhere whether there already are subcompartments of the type ‘space generated between planes’, and if so, thenthe user is asked whether these have to be converted to the type ‘with coordinates’, because the generation ofphysical planes is only possible on the basis of this type of subcompartments. Subsequently is tested which sub-compartments overlap. A report is given of this (when this is very long, it can be cut and pasted to word processorfor further printing or further study). At all compartments of which has been defined that their convertibility is‘automatic at conversion’, is filled in at the smallest subcompartment of the two overlapping ones that this maynot be included in the conversion of option 6.1 above.

10.8.3 Clean pre-2012 PIAS compartments

In the old PIAS compartment module Compart subcompartments could only be limited by eight vertices. Apartfrom that, there was the requirement that they would be ‘convex’, and in the test on convexity vertices werenot allowed to converse precisely. That resulted in defining vertices for, for example, three-sides or taperedcompartments with differences of millimeters. Here, in Newlay, this is no longer necessary, and being moreserious, those differences of millimeters are counterproductive, because when Newlay is constructing physicalplanes, then there is actually made a plane of one millimeter, and that does not make for overview. The presentoption detects those differences and almost converging vertices are actually contracted. One must realise, however,that this option does not repair all anomalies, so that manual adjustments might be necessary, for example in theevent of:

• Larger differences than two millimeters. The algorithm would be capable of that of course, but it remainsto be seen to what extent a program must change the data imported by the user autonomously.

• A limiting plane of a subcompartment that is warped (not purely plane). Within a subcompartment of thetype ‘with coordinates’ cannot be objected against it, but this cannot be used to generate physical planes(for they have to be entirely straight).



10.8.4 Import PIAS compartments in pre-2012 format

With this option compartments in the format of the former PIAS compartment module Compart are read in, andconverted to Newlay compartments of the type ‘with coordinates’. The user is supposed to indicate such an oldfile, its file extension is .cmp.

10.8.5 Export compartments to PIAS’ pre-2012 format

With this option all Newlay compartments are converted to a format that is useful for Compart, and PIAS modulesthat (still) use that format. See for further explanation section 10.10 on this page, Compatibilitity with the formercompartment module of PIAS. When a subcompartment in Newlay is limited by more than four points, then thatis automatically split up in the Compart format in several subcompartments of four points, because Compart usedto be designed for that number.

10.8.6 Export decks and bulkheads to Rapid Prototyping format (STL)

With this option bulkheads and deckas are converted to STL(see en.wikipedia.org/wiki/STL_(file_format) format, which is suitable for Rapid prototyping (or

3D printing). This option is still experimental, and only available to SARC. On www.sarc.nl/images/pdf/

publications/dutch/2012/Ultimaker%20illustraties%20en%20links.pdf is an example of how to usesuch STL file in order to print a ships’ subdivision three-dimensionally.

10.8.7 Write XML file

In view of communication with other software one may export the ships’ subdivision data in an XML file withthis option. This option is still experimental, non-documented, and subject to extension or modification.

10.8.8 Read XML file

See section 10.8.7 on the current page, Write XML file.

10.9 File and backup management

Backups of the ships’ subdivision can be made and restored here. Here is also the option ‘Stop without saving’.See for the details section 3.7 on page 16, Backups.

10.10 Compatibilitity with the former compartment module of PIAS

Around 1985, the PIAS module Compart has been developed, with which compartments could be defined and tanktables etc. could be calculated. More details can be found in Chapter 210 of the former PIAS manual. The moduleNewlay, which has been developed in the years 2010-2012, has the same purposes, but is much more extensive,and disposes of a GUI. This transition from Compart to Newlay has two consequences, which are set out below:

10.10.1 Compartment files

At this moment, PIAS is in a transitional phase as far as the compartments are concerned; the compartments canbe designed and/or imported with Newlay, but many follow-up calculations (such as tank volume, intact stability,grain and tonnage calculations) still have to be carried out with PIAS modules that have not yet been adapted to thefile format of Newlay. That’s why for the benefit of these calculations a file format has to be made from the Newlaydata that is compatible with Compart. That is possible in two manners, see section 10.8.5 on the current page,Export compartments to PIAS’ pre-2012 format and section 10.5.4 on page 129, general program configurations,option [generate PIAS compartments when saving]. One should be aware, however, that the follow-up calculationsare carried out with the most recent internal geometry model, which can be done, of course, with module Compart.


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/STL_(file_format)

www.sarc.nl/images/pdf/publications/dutch/2012/Ultimaker%20illustraties%20en%20links.pdf

www.sarc.nl/images/pdf/publications/dutch/2012/Ultimaker%20illustraties%20en%20links.pdf

10.10 Compatibilitity with the former compartment module of PIAS 139

This involves the risk that one, in the heat of the moment, makes a change in Compart, which is not implementedin Newlay, and which gets lost when one regenerates Compart files from Newlay later on. Therefore Compart willonly be available on the long run as a verification device, which means that the compartments can be looked at,but can no longer be modified.

10.10.2 Functional enhancements of Newlay

Compared to Compart Newlay has many enhancements. In due course Newlay will be made available free of chargefor all PIAS users, but some of those specific enhancements are only available when their rights of use have beenpurchased. These enhancements are:

• The use of physical planes, and anything related to it.

• The use of subcompartments of other than four vertices (in Compart, namely, a subcompartment could onlyhave four vertices in the cross-section).

• The second sounding pipe at the compartment.

• Drawing of (sub)compartments in the ‘visual composing’ mode, as discussed in paragraph 10.4.1.1.4 onpage 122, View functions.

• The three-dimensional presentation, see section 10.6 on page 131, Threedimensional presentation.

• The subdivision plan, see section 10.7 on page 133, Subdivision plan.

• Saving or printing of three-dimensional, rendered pictures.

Apart from that, a number of functions of Newlay are focussed on specific projects, and therefore (still) notgenerally available:

• XML communication, see section 10.8.7 on the facing page, Write XML file and section 10.8.8 on thepreceding page, Read XML file.

• Generation of 3D printing files, see section 10.8.6 on the facing page, Export decks and bulkheads to RapidPrototyping format (STL).


Chapter 11

Hydrotables: create hydrostatics and stability tables

The Hydrotables module aimes at the computation and output of tables or diagrams of hydrostatical and stability propertieswhich are related to hull form and/or compartments. In particular:

• Hydrostatic tables.

• Tables and diagrams of cross curves (NKsin(ϕ) tables).

• Bonjean tables.

• Deadweight tables and deadweight scale.

• Tables of wind heeling moments.

• Tables and diagrams of maximum allowable Vertical center of Gravity (VCG’), for intact as well as damaged ship.

• Floodable length curves.

• Tables of maximum allowable grain heeling moments according the SOLAS Grain Code.

• Trim diagram according to van der Ham’s method.

11.1 Main menu

Having started up Hydrotables, one enters the main menu, the various options of which are explained in more detail in thefollowing sections.

Main menu

1. Configure table and diagrams

2. Specify output sequence

3. Print/plot the configured tables or diagrams

4. Write the configured output values to an XML file

5. Configure the Llocal cloud monitors

6. Activate the Local cloud monitors

7. Database of configurations


142 Hydrotables: create hydrostatics and stability tables

11.2 Configure table and diagrams

At this option, for each table or diagram the desired parameters can be specified, such as the trimming range, tableincrement or table type. The parameters can either be given for each individual table or diagram, or the mechanism canbe used which links a parameter to the same parameter in a different table or diagram.

In this menu the selection list as printed below appears, where for each table or diagram the different parameters canbe set. The linked parameters mechanism is only discussed at the first option, hydrostatic tables, for the application in theother tables is analogue.

1. Configure table and diagrams

1. Hydrostatics

2. Cross curve tables

3. Cross curve diagram

4. Bonjean tables

5. Deadweight tables

6. Deadweight schale

7. Wind heeling moment tables

8. Maximum VCG’ intact tables

9. Maximum VCG’ intact diagrams

10. Maximum VCG’ damaged tables

11. Floodable lengths curve

12. Maximum grain heeling moment tables

13. van der Ham’s trim diagram

11.2.1 Hydrostatics

11.2.2 Cross curve tables

11.2.3 Cross curve diagram

11.2.4 Bonjean tables

11.2.5 Deadweight tables

11.2.6 Deadweight schale

11.2.7 Wind heeling moment tables

11.2.8 Maximum VCG’ intact tables

11.2.9 Maximum VCG’ intact diagrams

11.2.10 Maximum VCG’ damaged tables

11.2.11 Floodable lengths curve

11.2.12 Maximum grain heeling moment tables

11.2.13 van der Ham’s trim diagram

11.3 Specify output sequence

11.4 Print/plot the configured tables or diagrams


11.5 Write the configured output values to an XML file 143

11.5 Write the configured output values to an XML file

11.6 Configure the Llocal cloud monitors

11.7 Activate the Local cloud monitors

11.8 Database of configurations

Backups of the configurations for th etables and diagrams can be made and restored here. Here is also the option ‘Stopwithout saving the configurations’. For details we refer to section 3.7 on page 16, Backups.


144 Hydrotables: create hydrostatics and stability tables


Chapter 12

Loading: loading conditions, stability and longitudinalstrength

With this module loading conditions can be defined. Stability, longitudinal strength and torsional moment particulars canbe calculated for these loading conditions, if the appropriate options are purchased. The results can be displayed on thescreen or printed on paper. Several tools are available to define the loading conditions, such as automatic tank reading, agraphical interface for tank filling and a common list of weight items. Some of these tools have to be purchased separately.If an option was not purchased, a message of similar wording will be displayed when the option is invoked. This programuses a number of general settings (angles of inclination, standard specific gravity of the outside water, etc). It is thereforeimportant to define these values correctly, using the module described in chapter 130.

Mainmenu

1. Graphical User Interface

2. Loading conditions

3. Input and settings intact stability and longitudinal strength

4. data for hopper stability calculations

5. Generation of loading conditions for simulation RoRo operations

6. Input damage stability data

7. Combined output to paper

12.1 Graphical User Interface

12.2 Loading conditions

12.2.1 Weight list

12.3 Input and settings intact stability and longitudinal strength

Mainmenu

1. Settings intact stability

2. Settings longitudinal strength

3. Definition of weight groups

4. Definition maximum allowable shearforces and bending moments

5. Define sections for sketches of tank contents

6. Define external forces such as anchor chains

7. Re-read ALL tank capacity tables for existing tank weight items


146 Loading: loading conditions, stability and longitudinal strength

12.3.1 Settings intact stability

12.3.2 Settings longitudinal strength

12.3.3 Definition of weight groups

12.3.4 Definition maximum allowable shearforces and bending moments

12.3.5 Define sections for sketches of tank contents

12.3.6 Define external forces such as anchor chains

12.3.7 Re-read ALL tank capacity tables for existing tank weight items

12.4 data for hopper stability calculations

12.5 Generation of loading conditions for simulation RoRo operations

12.6 Input damage stability data

12.7 Combined output to paper


Chapter 13

ASCPIAS: Conversion of a frame table in ASCII formatto PIAS format


148 ASCPIAS: Conversion of a frame table in ASCII format to PIAS format


Chapter 14

Conversion of the hullform from SIKOB to PIAS

This module converts a hullform and compartments, which are defined in SIKOB, to a hullform and compartments whichcan be used for PIAS. We strongly recommend to check the resulting hullform. Our experience is that it always needssome adaptations.

14.1 Guidelines for this module

This module is fully operational in Dutch and is available in English on request.


150 Conversion of the hullform from SIKOB to PIAS


Chapter 15

Piaseagl: Import/export to and from Eagle


152 Piaseagl: Import/export to and from Eagle


Chapter 16

Gastank: define gas tank shape

With this module horizontal gastanks, with a more or less circular sectional shape, can be defined parametrically, andconverted into a PIAS-sectional representation (.HYD file).

16.1 Main menu

Gas tank shape definition and generation of PIAS hull shape file

1. Parametric shape definition of the gas tank

2. Convert the parametric model into a PIAS hull shape file

16.1.1 Parametric shape definition of the gas tank

• Radius: radius of the tank.

• Length of the tank: the total length of the tank.

• Origin above base: height of the center of the tank (= the origin of the circle) above base.

• Origin from CL: the (transverse) distance of the center of the tank to center line.

• Type of tank head aft: the tank head type at the aft side. Three types are available :

– Circle head

– Korbogen head (R= 0.8 D)

– Deep dish head (R= 0.714 D)

• Type of tank head forward: the tank head type at the forward side, where the same three types are applicable.

• File name of tank: Name (and path) of the PIAS hull shape file name.

16.1.2 Convert the parametric model into a PIAS hull shape file

With this option the frame shapes of the tank are calculated and saved as PIAS hull shape. From this stage onthis file can be used as an ordinary hull file, which can e.g. be applied as ‘external compartment shape’ at thecompartmemnt definition module Newlay. Below an example of such a sectional representation is depicted.


154 Gastank: define gas tank shape

Figure 16.1: Cylinder tank


Chapter 17

Cntslot: container slot definition

With this module the container slots of a ship can be defined. The defined slots can be used by the container loadingmodule and by the layout/compartment module of PIAS.

17.1 Cntslot: container slot definition

Define container slots

1. Input general data

2. Input of basic configuration

3. Generate container slots according to basic configuration

4. Process container slots

17.2 General method of working

With the fourth option, [modify container slots], all slots can be entered or modified by the part. As an aid for quicklydefining all slots, this module offers the opportunity to enter a so-called basic configuration (second option). Withthe basic configuration a simple standard container arrangement can be defined. Only the 20’ slots are enteredhere. The 30’ and 40’ slots are generated then on the basis of the entered 20’ slots (third option). If the containerarrangement does not fit in the basic configuration (e.g. asymmetric arrangement, transverse containers, deviatingslot measures, etc.), then it is often practical to start with a basic configuration, which is a simplified model of thereal configuration. After generating all slots (third option), it is possible to supplement manually (fourth option).A basic configuration consists of:

• a specification of the 20’ slots per bay

• a specification of the constituent 20’ bays up to 40’ bays

• a specification of the obsolete bays for the purpose of the 30’ slots.

17.2.1 Input general data

Define general data

1. General slot data

2. Define types of containerslots

3. Define kinds of containerslots

4. 4 Selection of silhouette side-views


156 Cntslot: container slot definition

17.2.2 General slot data

The following can be entered here:

• Standard container height in metres.

• Sstandard centre of gravity height: the standard centre of gravity position in height of the containers as %of the total height

• Weight group number: This configuration is typical for the container module of (Loco)PIAS. After leavingthe container module the bays are added to the list of weight items of the loading condition. These baysthen get the weight group number which has been assigned here.

• Display markers: This configuration is typical for the container module of (Loco)PIAS. Herewith you canspecify whether the numbering of bay rows and tiers in the views in the graphic container module must bedisplayed.

• May 20’/30’ be placed on ... : The choices made here affect the conversion of the basic configuration intocontainer slots and are evident.

17.2.3 Define types of containerslots

In this menu the types of containers, which are used for the slot definition, are entered. Of each type a minimumand a maximum weight can be entered. In the graphic container module in (Loco)PIAS the weight is tested againstthese values. While defining slots (seesecref{cntslot,cntslot_modify}) the type must be entered per slot. Here youcan choose from the types given here.

17.2.4 Define kinds of containerslots

Here the kinds of containers can be entered. In the first column an abbreviation of a single character can beentered. In the second column a describing name. When defining slots, a choice can be made from the kinds givenhere when entering the kind of slot.

17.2.5 4 Selection of silhouette side-views

For the purpose of the side-view in the graphic container module, a silhouette can be chosen here. A choice canbe made from the windcontours defined by module 250 .

17.2.6 Input of basic configuration

In order to explain the input of a basic configuration, the input of a simple and imaginary container arrangementis discussed hereafter. This consists of four 20’ bays according to the measured sketch below.

In the first input screen the 20’ bays are entered. In this case these are bays 1,3,5 and 7.Define 40’After having chosen option ‘Define 40” you can state which 20’ bays together form a 40’ bay. In the first and

second column the numbers of the two constituent 20’ bays are entered. In the third column the number of thecomposed 40’ bays must be entered. In this example these are bays 1 & 3 (40’ bay 2) and 5 & 7 (40’ bay 4).

Per bay the following can be entered:

• Subbay: The name of the subbay concerned. While making a new line, the subbay default to be added getsthe name ‘subbay x’, in which x equals the number of already present subbays + 1.

• US from base: the vertical distance in metres measured from base ship to the bottom of the undermostcontainer of the subbay concerned.

• AS from App: the horizontal distance in metres measured from the aft perpendicular to the back of thecontainers in the subbay concerned.


17.2 General method of working 157

• Length: the container length in metres

• Breadth: the container breadth in metres.

• St.load 20’: the maximum allowable stackload in tonnes for 20’ containers.



• 30’ length: the length of a 30’ slot in metres.

• Obsolete bay: Enter the number of the obsolete bay when a 30’ slot is positioned. In the example, forinstance, bay 1 and bay 3 are put together to 30’ slot 3, where 20’ slot 1 is the obsolete bay.

• Row: Enter the number of rows of the subbay.

• Tiers: Enter the number of tiers of the subbay.

After this (Figure 10) the four completed menu screens of bays 1,3,5 and 7 of the example. Double-click on asubbay to define the slots. Options are <X>, <F> and <->. By double-clicking on a cell of the bay, these optionsare gone through. A ‘-’ means that no 20’ container can be positioned in the cell concerned. An ‘F’ means that a20’ reefer can be positioned. An ‘X’ means that a 20’ container can be positioned. With the function keys [Deck]and [Tank top] the row numbers and tier numbers are automatically assigned for resp. container above main deckor in the holds. Row numbers and tier numbers can also be entered or adapted manually.

17.2.7 Generate container slots according to basic configuration

By choosing this option all separate container slots are generated on the basis of the imported basic configuration.20, 30 and 40’ slots are generated. Per slot is determined in which slot containers must be positioned in order tomake the positioning of the slot concerned possible. This provides that containers cannot be loaded ‘floating’. Itis also determined which slots may not be loaded to, to allow positioning of the container, so containers cannotoverlap.

17.2.8 Process container slots

In this menu all container slots can be processed, added or removed separately.You can successively enter per slot:

• ID-Nr. This ID number is assigned automatically. If new slots are added, the new slot gets the highestoccurring ID number+1. The ID numbers are also used for references to other slots in connection with theallowability of positioning of the slots concerned (the columns ‘allo’ and ‘forbid’ respectively) . The IDnumbers need not be increasing.

• Bay, row an dtier numbers.

• L pos, which is the distance from the back of the slot to the App.

• B pos, the breadth from HS to the mirrorwise centre of the slot.

• H pos, the height from base to the bottom of the slot.

• L slot and B slot, which are the length and breadth of the slot.

• Type, the type of slot (20, 30, 40, 45 etc.). You can choose from the defined types (see section 17.2.3 on thefacing page, Define types of containerslots).

• Kind, the kind of slot (F, N, C , etc.). You can only choose from the defined kinds ( section 17.2.4 on thepreceding page, Define kinds of containerslots).

158 Cntslot: container slot definition

• Stackl, which is the maximum stackload near this slot H Max, the maximum heigth for the loaded containerin this slot. Allow, the number of slots that indicate whether a container can be positioned. This numbercannot be changed here. Double-click on the number to process the references. The references are to theID numbers of other slots. You can also give a combination (of maximally 3) slots. E.g. a combination oftwo 20’ containers on which a 40’ slot can be positioned. - Forbid, the number of slots that indicate whethera container cannot be positioned. The number cannot be changed in this menu. Double-click the cell toprocess the references. The references are to the ID numbers of other slots. In this case no combinationscan be given.

The [Error] function tests the defined slots. Any inconsistency found in the slot definitions is shown. Thefollowing messages can be given:

• There are no error messages.

• Slot xxx, height ‘allow’ is not right. The absolute difference in height between the top of the slot which isreferred to and the bottom of the slot concerned is greater than 0.1 m.

• Slot xxx, number ‘allow’ is not right.

• Slot xxx, reference ‘forbid’ is not right. From the slot which is referred to from the slot concerned andwhich does not allow positioning, is not referred back to the slot concerned.

• Slot xxx, breadth ‘forbid’ is not right.

• Slot xxx, length ‘forbid’ is not right.

• Slot xxx, number ‘forbid’ is not right.

The [Find and Replace] function searches for a number in the columns length, breadth and heigth position slot,length and breadth slot, stackload and maximum heigth. The number searched for is then replaced by a givenvalue. If ‘with confirmation’ has been enabled you will be asked for confirmation of replacement of each valuefound.

With the container module of Loading, or the layout module Newlay the defined slots can be checked visually.


Index

(in)visible, 1133Dconnexion, 40, 65

Abort, 72Access, 49action panel, 38actions, 42Alphanumerical manipulation, 85anGled, 128anti-aliasing, 64Apply, 43, 58, 59, 73Assign, 117ATi, 65Auto apply, 73Automat. Save, 67

background, 91bb subcompartiment, 126block coefficient, 61boundary conditions, 64Browse, 13

center of buoyancy, 61Change the shape of the curve, 43Change the Shape of the SAC, 61chine, 30, 56Circular gas tank, 154Clear, 45Clip Box Contain All, 62Clip to Box, 62Column, 120Common Settings..., 70Compart, 111compartiment, 108Config, 70Connect Points, 59consistent network, 29constrained dragging, 41context menu, 38Contourmodus, 115control polygon, 30contruction waterline, 56Coordinates, 122

Copy, 82, 120, 121Copy to clipboard, 73copy/paste, 57Create, 59Curvature, 38curvature, 30Curvature Plot, 37curvature plot, 30Curvature Plots, 37Curve, 47curve, 29Curve Follows Points, 51Curve Properties, 57Curves, 36, 37, 64Cut, 117CWL, 56

decimal mark, 38Deck, 157deck ay side, 56deck camber, 50defining lines, 33degrees of freedom, 31Delete, 46, 47, 61developable surface, 31Deviation, 44direction, 30, 37, 56direction of motion, 31dolly, 40domain, 33double, 57Drag, 45, 47, 61, 118Drag Offset, 50Drag Plane, 50Drag Position, 48Drag Tangent, 48dragger, 41driver, 65drop-down, 64dubbel subcompartiment, 126DXF, 74

Eagle, 74


160 INDEX

Edit, 73, 112, 113Edit Position-Sets..., 53, 55Edit refvlak, 128enter, 124Error, 158Exercises, 12

face, 31Fair, 44Fair crossing curves, 54Fairway: Lines design and fairing, 33File, 113Find, 127Find and Replace, 158Fit, 51, 62fixate, 45fly through, 40Frame Area, 51Free, 49fysiek vlak, 108

Generate, 128Generate Fillet Points, 59generate PIAS compartments when saving, 130, 138Generate VRML 1.0 file, 74Generate VRML97 file, 74Geometry, 127graphics driver, 65

Help, 34, 43, 128Hide Box, 62hotkey, 38hotspot, 41Hull Server, 76, 78, 80, 81hull server, 74Hullform definition, 33Hydrostatics, 62

IGES, 74Image, 20Individual Selection, 55Insert, 46, 47, 53, 61, 67, 121Insertrow, 122Installation options NetSentinel Pro, 10Installation options Sentinel Pro, 11Interpolate, 44Intersections, 45

Join Polycurves, 58

Knuckle, 45, 61knuckle, 30, 64

Leave, 35left, 30

Legacy Interface, 43, 57line direction, 30line order, 30Longitudinal Position, 50

Main menu, 12main menu, 7, 12Manage, 120Manuals, 11Master, 48Mastership, 80Mean fairing deviation, 44, 45Memory, 34middle mouse button, 65modify container slots, 155More, 47mouse, 39Move Polycurve, 54moving points, 31

Name, 52, 53name, 56Names, 136Names and colors per item category, 136Navigate action history, 43Navigation, 41navigation, 39Navigation Mode, 41New, 53, 67, 121new, 35New Planar Polycurve by Intersection, 52Newrow, 122No, 83None, 13Number, 52numerical input, 38NUPAS, 74, 80

Offset, 76OK, 35, 73OpenGL, 64Option, 12Orientation, 52orientation, 39Orientation axes, 39orientation axes, 39

pan, 39, 113parallel projection, 36Paste, 73, 120, 121paste, 121Paste Link, 120, 121paste Link, 121perspective, 40


INDEX 161

perspective projection, 36phantom face, 57PIAS-import, 54Pick Point, 48Plane, 111, 112plate boundary, 57point weight, 64Points, 45Points Follow Curve, 51polycurve, 29polycurve direction, 56polycurve name, 56polycurve type, 56Position, 52Position-Sets, 53, 55Print image, 73problem, 63Process, 46Process All, 44production fairing, 75Project Setup, 34projection, 36Properties of Polycurves, 56

Quit, 34quit without save, 17

radius of curvature, 30Redistribute, 45Redo, 38redo, 43referentievlak, 108Refplane, 111Remove, 17, 53, 121Remove eMpty, 118Remove Points, 55Remove Polycurve, 55removerow, 122render defects, 65Repetition, 52Repetition Interval, 52Reposition, 47Reset, 43restOre, 17reverse polycurve direction, 57right, 30rotate, 40, 113RTF, 20

SAC, 51, 62, 81Save, 38sb subcompartiment, 126Scheepsvorm exporteren, 74Sectional Area Curve, 63

sectional area curve, 51, 61, 62, 81Sectional Area Curve (SAC), 61Select, 49, 67Select Nearest, 73Selection Screen, 14sentinel, 10Settings, 50, 54Setup, 14, 34, 73, 114, 115Setup (program setup), 14Shape Factor, 48Show, 51Show Curvature Plot, 51Single Configuration, 52size, 91solid modeller, 28Sort, 120, 127SpaceNavigator, 40, 65spin, 40Spline, 30Split Polycurve, 58Stack, 36subcompartiment, 108subcompartiment subtype ‘anders dan vier

langsribben’,, 121, 122subcompartiment subtype ‘eenvoudig blok’, 121,

122subcompartiment subtype ‘vier langsribben’, 121,

122subcompartiment type ‘externe PIAS scheepsvorm’,

108subcompartiment type ‘met coördinaten’, 108subcompartiment type ‘ruimte ontstaan tussen

vlakken’, 108surface, 31Surfacemodel, 122Swap, 46, 117

T, 45Tabbed text, 20Tables, 120Tank top, 157Text, 20Tile, 35Transform, 85Transparent, 123Tree View, 36tree view, 42, 49

Undo, 38, 120, 127undo, 43Unhide, 36Update, 62USB sentinel, 10


162 INDEX

vertex, 30vertices, 30View, 113view all, 39visually composed, 122vlak, 107volgens coördinaten type subcompartiment, 126VRML, 73

W, 44, 46walk through, 40weight, 64Weighting, 46

Yes, 76, 83

zoom, 39zoom all, 39


piasmanual en

Documents

stability calculations

general setup

contents1 pias

pias renewals

pias main menu

damage stability

program setup

data input